GE Multilin F650 Скачать руководство пользователя | Manualshive

Страница: 105 / 801

background image

4-32

F650 Digital Bay Controller

GEK-106310AB

4.1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES. SETTINGS & ACTUAL VALUES

4

4.1.12 SECURITY MENU OVERVIEW

The security menu includes all the menus related to security control in EnerVista 650 Setup. EnerVista 650 Setup security
users and passwords are not related to passwords in HMI. Each security level has its own access for HMI management
and EnerVista 650 Setup management.

Table 4.25: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF SECURITY MENU:

Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)

4.1.13 VIEW MENU OVERVIEW

The view menu includes the computer screen to start communicating with the relay, the different update procedures
available in device: firmware, operative system, web server and other file storing capabilities (upload and download info
files to/from relay).

The ModBus memory map is detailed in the complete instruction manual (English only) and can be obtained from EnerVista
650 Setup program.

Table 4.26: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF VIEW MENU:

Options enabled only in On-line mode are marked as (*). Options enabled only in Off-line mode are marked as (**)

4.1.14 HELP MENU OVERVIEW

Complete instructions manual and data about EnerVista 650 Setup release.

Table 4.27: GENERAL OVERVIEW OF HELP MENU:

SECURITY

Login User (*)

Log on menu for EnerVista 650 Setup. Enabled after security control has
been enabled in user management menu.

Change Password (*)

Menu to change passwords and establish password recovering
questions.

User Management (*)

User management dialog box.

VIEW

Traces (*)

To inspect ModBus communication traces between the EnerVista 650
Setup and the relay.

ModBus Memory map

Complete ModBus memory map description.

Languages (**)

Option to change the EnerVista 650 Setup default language. Only
available if the relay is not communicating and no file (*650) is open.

HELP

Instructions Manual

Instructions manual in the language selected in "View>Languages"
menu.

GE Mulitlin on the Web

GE Multilin web page link.

About EnerVista 650
Setup

Release version and date of EnerVista 650 Setup program.

«
...
103
104
105
106
107
...
»

Содержание Multilin F650

Страница 1: ...ilin ge com www GEDigitalEnergy com Firmware version 5 6x EnerVista F650 Setup version 6 2x Copyright 2014 GE Digital Energy F650 Digital Bay Controller Instructions Manual GEK 106310AB GE Digital Energy Avda Pinoa 10 48170 Zamudio ESPAÑA T 34 94 485 88 00 F 34 94 485 88 45 E gemultilin euro ge com GE Digital Energy ...

Страница 2: ... OVERVIEW 2 1 1 F650 OVERVIEW 2 1 2 2 SUMMARY 2 2 1 ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS 2 2 2 2 2 OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS 2 3 2 3 ORDERING CODE 2 4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2 4 1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 2 6 2 4 2 CONTROL 2 16 2 4 3 MONITORING 2 20 2 4 4 USER PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS 2 22 2 4 5 METERING 2 23 2 4 6 INPUTS 2 24 2 4 7 REAL TIME CLOCK 2 26 2 4 8 OUTPUTS 2 26 2 4 9 CONTROL POWER SUPPLY 2 27 2 4 1...

Страница 3: ...TONS 4 35 4 2 4 FRONT PORT AND COVER SEALING SYSTEM 4 37 4 2 5 TEXT MENUS 4 38 4 2 6 GRAPHIC DISPLAY 4 57 4 3 WEB SERVER 4 3 1 HOME 4 66 4 3 2 SNAPSHOT EVENTS 4 67 4 3 3 CONTROL EVENTS 4 68 4 3 4 ALARMS 4 69 4 3 5 OSCILLOGRAPHY 4 70 4 3 6 FAULT REPORT 4 71 4 3 7 DATA LOGGER 4 72 4 3 8 METERING 4 73 5 SETTINGS 5 1 OVERVIEW 5 1 1 SETTING MAIN MENU 5 1 5 2 PRODUCT SETUP 5 2 1 COMMUNICATION SETTINGS 5...

Страница 4: ...S 5 134 5 6 9 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS LATCHED 5 134 5 7 REMOTE COMMS 5 8 TESTING 5 8 1 FORCE IO INPUT TESTING 5 136 5 8 2 FORCE IO OUTPUT TESTING 5 136 5 9 RELAY CONFIGURATION 5 9 1 OUTPUTS 5 137 5 9 2 LEDS 5 138 5 9 3 OPERATIONS 5 139 5 9 4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5 143 5 9 5 OSCILLOGRAPHY 5 144 5 9 6 CONTROL EVENTS 5 145 5 9 7 SWITCHGEAR 5 147 5 9 8 HMI HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE 5 149 5 9 9 ENERVISTA 650PC HM...

Страница 5: ...WAVEFORM CAPTURE 6 44 6 5 3 FAULT REPORT 6 45 6 5 4 DATA LOGGER 6 46 7 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7 1 IEC61850 GENERIC SUBSTATION STATE EVENT GSSE 7 1 1 REMOTE DEVICES 7 1 7 1 2 REMOTE INPUTS 7 3 7 1 3 REMOTE OUTPUTS 7 4 7 2 IEC 61850 PROFILE FOR F650 7 2 1 OVERVIEW 7 6 7 2 2 COMMUNICATION PROFILES 7 8 7 2 3 TCP CONNECTION TIMING 7 8 7 2 4 MMS PROTOCOL 7 8 7 2 5 PEER TO PEER COMMUNICATION 7 8 7 2 6 FILE S...

Страница 6: ...TS 10 11 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT 50PH 50PL 50N 50G Y 50SG 10 12 TIME OVERCURRENT 51PH 51PL 51N 51G AND 46 10 13 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS 67P 67N 67G 67SG 10 13 1 67P ELEMENT 10 16 10 13 2 67N ELEMENT 10 16 10 13 3 67G ELEMENT 10 18 10 13 4 67SG ELEMENT 10 19 10 14 UNDERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS 27P 27X 10 14 1 27P ELEMENT 10 20 10 14 2 27X ELEMENT 10 20 10 15 OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENTS 59P 59X 59NH 59NL 47 10 15 1...

Страница 7: ...RECOMMENDED ACTIONS A LOGIC OPERANDS A 1 LOGIC OPERANDS B MODBUS PROTOCOL B 1 ACCESS TO F650 DATA B 2 MODBUS F650 B 2 1 FUNCTIONS USED B 2 B 2 2 PHYSICAL LAYER B 2 B 2 3 DATA LINK LAYER B 3 B 2 4 GENERIC READING B 4 B 2 5 GENERIC WRITING B 5 B 2 6 FUNCTION CODES B 6 B 2 7 EXCEPTIONS AND ERROR RESPONDS B 6 B 3 DATA TYPE B 4 MODBUS APPENDIX B 4 1 DATA MANAGEMENT B 8 B 4 2 WRITING SETTINGS B 8 B 4 3 ...

Страница 8: ...4 C 5 3 MULTIPLE DNP 3 0 MASTERS COMMUNICATION WITH F650 C 16 C 6 BINARY OUTPUT AND CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT C 7 BINARY COUNTERS C 8 ANALOG INPUTS D IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOL D 1 INTRODUCTION D 2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION D 3 BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS D 4 IEC 104 SETTINGS D 5 IEC 60870 5 104 POINT LIST E PROCOME PROTOCOL E 1 PROCOME PROTOCOL F IEC 60870 5 103 PROTOCOL F 1 IEC 60870 5 103 PROTOCOL F 1 1 I...

Страница 9: ...8 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB TABLE OF CONTENTS ...

Страница 10: ... guide you through the initial installation procedures of your new relay BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL OR USE THE RELAY IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT ALL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE REVIEWED TO HELP PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND OR DOWNTIME CAUTION THE OPERATOR OF THIS INSTRUMENT IS ADVISED THAT IF THE EQUIPMENT IS USED IN A MANNER NOT SPECIFIED IN THIS MANUAL THE PROTECTION PRO...

Страница 11: ...SHALL ONLY BE PERFORMED BY DULY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL FOR PERSONAL SECURITY PURPOSES BEFORE ACCOMPLISHING ANY WITHDRAWAL OR INSERTION OPERATION THE RELAY MUST BE POWERED OFF AND ALL THE REAR TERMINALS MUST BE POTENTIAL FREE THE RELAY MUST BE GROUNDED USING THE REAR GROUNDING SCREW Before performing any of these actions control power must be removed from the relay and all the rear terminals m...

Страница 12: ...e The current inputs incorporate shorting bars so that the module can be extracted without the need to short circuit the currents externally It is very important for safety reasons not to change or switch the terminals for CTs and VTs Figure 1 3 REAR VIEW OF F650 UNIT GE Multilin will not be responsible for any damage of the relay connected equipment or personnel whenever these safety rules are no...

Страница 13: ...MPORTANT PROCEDURES 1 GETTING STARTED 1 1 1 2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST Unwrap the relay and inspect the relay for physical damage Verify that the model on the label on the side of the relay matches the model ordered Figure 1 4 IDENTIFICATION LABEL A4455P6 ...

Страница 14: ...lin immediately at EUROPE MIDDLE EAST AND AFRICA GE Digital Energy Av Pinoa 10 48170 Zamudio Vizcaya SPAIN Tel 34 94 485 88 54 Fax 34 94 485 88 38 E mail multilin tech euro ge com AMERICA ASIA AND AUSTRALIA GE Digital Energy 650 Markland Street Markham Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 Tel 1 905 927 7070 Fax 1 905 927 5098 E mail gemultilin ge com The information provided herein is not intended to cover all ...

Страница 15: ...using a laptop it is recommended not to have it connected to its power supply In many cases it might not be correctly grounded either due to the power supply or to the connector cables used This is required not only for personal protection but also to avoid a potential voltage difference between the relay s serial port and the computer s port which could produce permanent damage to the computer or...

Страница 16: ...de prender des mesures spècifiques peut entraîner des pertes de données ou même causer des dommages physiques WARNING Dangerous voltage constituting a risk of electric shock is present within the unit Failure to take or avoid a specified action could result in physical harm to the user AVERTISSEMENT Tensions dangereuses comportant un risque de choc électrique sont presents dans l equipement L abse...

Страница 17: ...ncy These objectives are realized through software which is used to perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels The use of these systems is growing rapidly High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems In the near future very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signall...

Страница 18: ...utput contacts from independent modules connected to the 650 unit via a CAN Bus Not available for W650 models PLC Programmable Logic Controller Control module that enables the unit configuration assignment of inputs outputs and the implementation of logic circuits Protection Elements Relay protection elements for example Overcurrent overvoltage etc Not available for C650 models Remote inputs and o...

Страница 19: ...or the connection to the Remote CAN BUS I O module This feature allows increasing up to 100 the I O capability when the maximum number of I Os available inside the relay is not enough for a specific application Available options are Table 1 1 REAR SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS BOARD 1 The other module provides Ethernet communications COM3 port using 10 100BaseTX self negotiable speed or 100BaseFX connecto...

Страница 20: ...CAN bus independent from the one used for remote CAN BUS I Os This fact provides increased communication speed as well as the possibility of acknowledgement of modules abnormalities etc As this is a serial port supporting a communications protocol it provides extraordinary immunity against external or internal disturbances Figure 1 7 COMMUNICATIONS ARCHITECTURE B6816F1 ...

Страница 21: ... Windows 2000 Windows XP Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher 64 MB of RAM 128 MB recommended 40 MB of available space on system drive and 40 MB of available space on installation drive RS232C serial and or Ethernet port for communications to the relay 1 3 2 INSTALLATION After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista 650 Setup are met see previous section use the following procedure to ins...

Страница 22: ...indow as shown below Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release or select CD if you do not have a web connection then click the Add Now button to list software items for the F650 Figure 1 9 ADD PRODUCT WINDOW 6 If Web option is selected choose the F650 software program and release notes if desired from the list and click the Download Now button to obtain the installation prog...

Страница 23: ...in the directory indicated and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista 650 Setup to the Windows start menu 10 Follow the on screen instructions to install the EnerVista 650 Setup software When the Welcome window appears click on Next to continue with the installation procedure Figure 1 11 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP INSTALLATION 11 When the Choose Destination Location wi...

Страница 24: ...pplication will be added to is shown in the Selected Program Folder window Click Next to begin the installation process and all the necessary program files will be copied into the chosen directory Figure 1 13 SELECT PROGRAM FOLDER 13 To finish with the installation process select the desired language for startup Figure 1 14 LANGUAGE WINDOW ...

Страница 25: ...m the GE EnerVista CD or online from http www GEindustrial com multilin see previous section for installation instructions 2 Go to Communication Computer and enter the following data referring to communications 3 Select Control Type as MODBUS TCP IP from the drop down list This option will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet communications 4 Enter the ...

Страница 26: ...and enter the following data referred to communications 3 Select Control Type as No Control Type from the drop down list This option will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper serial communications 4 Enter the relay Slave Address Setpoint Product Setup Communication Settings ModBus Protocol menu in the Slave Address field The default value is 254 5 Enter the phys...

Страница 27: ...s that could be caused by external noise it is recommended to use a shielded twist pair In order to avoid loops where external currents could flow the cable shield must be grounded only at one end The converter box GND terminals are connected to the relay SDA SDB GND terminals respectively For long communications cables longer than 1 km the RS485 circuit must be terminated in an RC network i e 120...

Страница 28: ...thernet port from a PC a crossover cable is required If the connection is performed through a hub or a switch a direct Ethernet cable is required 1 4 3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY All messages are displayed on a 20x4 character LCD display An optional graphic display is also available Messages are displayed in different languages according to selected model 1 4 4 MAINTENANCE F650 requires a minimum amount of...

Страница 29: ...tion or visual verification of setting file entries against relay settings schedule 4 Contact inputs and outputs verification This test can be conducted by direct change of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing 5 Visual inspection for any damage corrosion or dust 6 Event recorder file download with further events analysis Unscheduled maintenance such as during a disturbance cau...

Страница 30: ...k used for time tagging can be synchronized with an IRIG B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to be determined throughout the system Oscillography data capture may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal computer PC These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time...

Страница 31: ...0SG Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent for sensitive ground systems measured from 5th current transformer 50ISG Isolated Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent measured from 5th current transformer 51P Phase Time Overcurrent with Voltage Restraint two elements High and Low 51SG Ground Time Overcurrent for sensitive ground systems measured from 5th current transformer 67P Phase Directional 67SG Sensitive G...

Страница 32: ...2 Self Reset Virtual Inputs Three Phase Energy IEC 870 5 104 Virtual Outputs up to 512 Frequency ModBus User Map Tripping and closing circuit supervision Sequence components of currents and voltages IEC 61850 Remote Inputs Outputs GSSE and GOOSE messages Pulse Counters IEC 870 5 103 protocol Analog Inputs dCmA Analog Comparators USER INTERFACE RECORDS OTHERS Alphanumerical display 4x20 Data Logger...

Страница 33: ...MMUNICATIONS BOARD 2 B 10 100 Base TX C 10 100 Base TX 100 Base FX D 10 100 Base TX Redundant 100 Base FX E Redundant 10 100 Base TX I O BOARD IN SLOT F 1 16 Digital Inputs 8 Outputs 2 8 Digital Inputs 8 Outputs 2 trip close circuit supervision circuits 4 32 Digital Inputs 5 16 Digital Inputs 8 Analog Inputs I O BOARD IN SLOT G 0 None 1 16 Digital Inputs 8 Outputs 4 32 Digital Inputs see Note 1 5 ...

Страница 34: ... O boards as if they were internal boards located on slots F and G In this case slots are labeled as H y J The required information to completely define a CIO Module is shown on Table 2 2 Table 2 2 ORDERING CODE FOR CIO MODULE 1 The digit selected for option J must be equal or higher than the digit selected for option H for models including boards 4 and 5 CIOH1J5 is a valid selection CIOH5J1 is an...

Страница 35: ... PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT 51PH 51PL Current Input Phasor without harmonics or RMS Rated current For connection to 1 or 5 A CTs Pickup level 0 05 to 160 00 A in steps of 0 01 A Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level Accuracy Values at nominal frequency 0 5 of the reading 10 mA from 0 05 to 10 A 1 5 of the reading for higher values Curve Shapes IEEE extremely very moderately inverse IEC A B ...

Страница 36: ...me delayed according to IEEE Timing accuracy Operate at 1 03 times the pickup 3 of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater Saturation Level 48 times the pickup level Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Current Input Fundamental Phasor without harmonics Pickup level 0 05 to 160 00 A in steps of 0 01 A Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level Accuracy Values at nominal frequency 0 5 of ...

Страница 37: ...e Curve Multiplier Time Dial 0 00 to 900 00 s in steps of 0 01 s Reset type Instantaneous or time delayed according to IEEE Timing accuracy Operate at 1 03 times the pickup 3 of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater Saturation Level 48 times the pickup level Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Current Input Phasor without harmonics or RMS Rated current For connection to 1 or 5 A CTs Pickup ...

Страница 38: ... x Pickup at 50 Hz typically Timing accuracy at 0 ms time delay no intentional delay 50ms at non zero time delay 3 of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Current Input Phasor without harmonics or RMS Rated current For connection to 1 or 5 A CTs Pickup level 0 005 to 16 000 A in steps of 0 001 A Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level Accuracy V...

Страница 39: ...on zero time delay 3 of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Current Input Fundamental Phasor without harmonics Pickup level 0 05 to 160 0 A in steps of 0 01 A Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level Accuracy Values at nominal frequency 0 5 of the reading 10 mA from 0 05 to 10 A 1 5 of the reading for higher values Curve Shapes IEEE extremely ve...

Страница 40: ...ltage VN measured or calculated selected by setting Polarizing Current Isg measured from 5th current transformer Operating Current Ig measured from 4th current transformer Polarizing Voltage threshold 0 to 300 Vac in steps of 1 V Polarizing Current threshold 0 005 A Characteristic angle 90º to 90º in steps of 1º Block Logic Permission or Block selectable by setting Angle accuracy 3º for I 0 1 A an...

Страница 41: ...ickup level 0 05 to 160 0 A in steps of 0 01 A Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level Accuracy Values at nominal frequency 0 5 of the reading 10 mA from 0 05 to 10 A 1 5 of the reading for higher values Timing accuracy 3 5 of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater Heating constant 3 0 to 600 0 minutes in steps of 0 1 minute Cooling constant 1 00 to 6 00 times the heating constant in ...

Страница 42: ... of 1 V Logic Any Two All phases logic selectable by setting Supervised by Breaker Selectable by setting Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Voltage Input Fundamental Phasor of the neutral voltage Pickup level 3 to 300 in steps of 1 V Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level accuracy 1 of reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency Trip delay 0 00 to 900 00 s in steps of 0 01 s Reset d...

Страница 43: ...ntal Phasor of the auxiliary voltage Pickup level 3 to 300 V in steps of 1 V Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level accuracy 1 of reading from 10 to 208 V at nominal frequency Curve Shapes Fixed time or inverse curve Reset type Instantaneous Curve Multiplier Time Dial 0 00 to 900 00 s in steps of 0 01 s Timing accuracy 3 5 of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater Snapshot Events Sel...

Страница 44: ...es 0 00 10000 00 MW in steps of 0 01 MW Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level accuracy for primary magnitudes 3 complete range Trip delay two stages 0 00 to 900 00 s in steps of 0 01 s Timing accuracy 3 5 of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater Block Time after close 0 00 to 900 00 s in steps of 0 01 s Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Current Voltage Fundamental Phasor primar...

Страница 45: ...1 Power Pickup Level 0 01 to 4 50 Watts in steps of 0 01 Characteristic Angle MTA 0 to 360º in steps of 1 Power Pickup Delay 0 00 to 600 00 seconds in steps of 0 01 Level Accuracy for Power 2 5 of the reading at 0 8 PF 1 and 0 8 PF 1 Curve Shapes Inverse Curve Definite time FlexCurve A B C D user curve Curve Multiplier Time Dial 0 02 to 2 00 s in steps of 0 01 s Tripping time accuracy 3 5 of opera...

Страница 46: ...l Phasor without harmonics Rated current For connection to 1 or 5 A CTs Pickup level for supervision 0 05 to 160 00 A in steps of 0 01 A Pickup level for high level 0 05 to 160 00 A in steps of 0 01 A Pickup level for low level 0 05 to 160 00 A in steps of 0 01 A Pickup level for internal arcing 0 05 to 160 00 A in steps of 0 01 A Dropout level 97 to 98 of the pickup level Level Accuracy 0 5 of th...

Страница 47: ...3 x Pickup at 50 Hz typically Timing accuracy 3 of operate time or 50 ms whichever is greater Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Number of Pulse counters available Up to 8 Multiplier factor 0 000 to 65000 000 in steps of 0 001 Overload factor 0 to 1000000 in steps of 1 Board Origin All available input outputs boards in the device See ordering code F G H J Input origin up to 32 depending on the ...

Страница 48: ...equency Rate delay 0 00 to 60 00 s in steps of 0 01 Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Responds to Positive sequence quantities Minimum voltage 0 00 to 300 00 V in steps of 0 01 Reach sec Ω 0 02 to 250 00 Ω in steps of 0 01 Impedance accuracy 3 Angle 5 to 50º in steps of 1 Angle accuracy 3º Pickup delay 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 Reset delay 0 000 to 65 535 s in steps of 0 001 Time acc...

Страница 49: ...a PLC Data 5 current channels and 4 voltage channels Up to 16 digital channels programmable through PLC Data Storage In non volatile memory flash without battery Format International Standard COMTRADE ASCII IEEE C37 111 1999 Automatic Overwrite Selectable by setting Oscillography records can be concatenated Snapshot Events Selectable by setting Method Single ended Positive Sequence Module 0 01 to ...

Страница 50: ...c cycle using an internal clock of 100 μs For Digital Inputs the debounce time of these digital inputs must be added Timing Accuracy 1 ms using the IRIG B synchronization input Triggers By any digital signal programmable through PLC Alarm Possibility to display the event as an alarm on the alarms panel Information available always through Communications for all models and also in HMI for models wi...

Страница 51: ...gical gates fully programmable by user To create user programmable logic to be distributed as a single object Inputs Any logical variable contact or virtual input Number of timers 8 maximum in each logic scheme provided in library format Number 4 A through D Reset points 40 0 through 1 of pickup Operate points 80 1 through 20 of pickup Time delay 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1 Saturation Level 20 tim...

Страница 52: ...s only Number of selectable displays Logotype metering or both in scrolling mode can be selectable as default screen in text display for all models basic and mimic The metering screen contains current and voltages for phases and ground in primary values Number of configurable Keys 5 Operation drive PLC operands Accuracy 0 5 of the reading 10 mA from 0 05 to 10 A for phases and ground at nominal fr...

Страница 53: ...0 of the reading Range 2147483 to 2147483 MVArh Parameters 3 phase only Update rate 100 ms Accuracy 0 03Hz From 30 to 80 Hz Accuracy 3º CT Ratio 1 0 to 6000 0 in steps of 0 1 Rated currents Appropriate for 1 or 5 A F650 has universal range for CT valid for 1 or 5 A to only one terminal Relay Burden 0 04 Ohm Current Withstand Continuous at 20 A 1 second at 500 A for phases and ground 1 second at 50...

Страница 54: ...ge supervision inputs 2 mA V 100 kOhm Voltage threshold for voltage supervision inputs 10 V fixed Debounce Time 1 to 50 in steps of 1 ms Recognition time 1ms Timing resolution 1 ms For Input Activation Voltage Threshold and Debounce Time there is a single setting for all inputs in the same group inputs sharing the same common Input Type and Delay Input Time are not grouped there is a different set...

Страница 55: ...ore than 1 week Single Contact Carry continuous 16 A Make and Carry for 1 sec 60 A Break at L R of 40 ms 0 3 A DC max at 125 Vdc 0 25 A DC max at 250 Vdc Operate Time 8 ms Contact material Silver Alloy Output Logic Type Output Type and Pulse Output Time are selectable by setting for each output Output Logic Type Positive Negative Output Type Normal Pulse Latch Selectable by setting for each output...

Страница 56: ...imum consumption FRONT PORT Front port COM2 Type RS232 USB Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 y 115200 bauds Default Baud Rate 19200 Protocols available ModBus RTU DNP 3 0 Typical distance 3 m Isolation 2 kV ASYNCHRONOUS REAR PORTS None or two rear ports depending on model COM1 COM2 rear COM2 multiplexed with front port Type depending on model Model F None Model A Redundant RS...

Страница 57: ...and glass fiber Isolation 2 kV ETHERNET PORT Rear port COM3 Type depending on model Model B 10 100BaseTX self negotiable Model C 10 100BaseTX 100Base FX Model D 10 100BaseTX redundant 100BaseFX Physical media redundancy Model E Redundant 10 100BaseTX self negotiable ports 10 100BaseTX RJ45 connector 100BaseFX ST connectors Wave length 1300 nm Fiber type multimode 62 5 125 μm or 50 125 μm Protocols...

Страница 58: ...e to a logic 0 input This specification applies to either 62 5 125 μm or 50 125 μm fiber cables 3 This specification is intended to indicate the performance of the receiver section of the transceiver when Input Optical Power signal characteristics are present per the following definitions The Input Optical Power dynamic range from the minimum level with a window time width to the maximum level is ...

Страница 59: ... EMC IEC 61000 4 1 IEC 60255 22 1 III Oscillatory waves immunity IEC 61000 4 2 IEC 60255 22 2 IV Electrostatic discharge immunity test IEC 61000 4 3 IEC 60255 22 3 III Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance test IEC 61000 4 4 IEC 60255 22 4 IV Electrical fast transient IEC 61000 4 5 IEC 60255 22 5 IV Surge immunity test IEC 61000 4 6 IEC 60255 22 6 III Conducted electromagnetic field disturban...

Страница 60: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 2 31 2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2 5 EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS 2 2 5EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS Figure 2 2 F650 WIRING DIAGRAM 189C4216H2 5 CO C O S ...

Страница 61: ... F K C O L B P 0 5 F7 CC3 5 2 F K C O L B P 1 5 F8 CC4 6 2 F K C O L B P 7 6 F9 COMMON 1 4 COMMON 1 4 F27 F10 COMMON 5 8 COMMON 5 8 F28 F11 CC5 9 2 F K C O L B G 0 5 F12 CC6 0 3 F K C O L B G 1 5 F13 CC7 79 INITIATE I SENS F31 F14 CC8 2 3 F K C O L B 9 7 F15 COIL 2 F33 S N E S I a 2 5 6 1 F F34 F17 COIL 2 F35 F18 52 b F36 INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION FOR BOARDS F1 AND F2 O7 27 59 PICKUP 50 67G PIC...

Страница 62: ...es via a high speed CAN bus Transformers module with 5 current transformers and 4 voltage transformers CPU including a powerful DSP for measure processing as well as synchronous and asynchronous communication accessories Input Output module included in basic unit Optionally a second I O module can be added H Hi ig gh h S Sp pe ee ed d s se er ri ia al l C CA AN N B Bu us s A An na al lo og g i in ...

Страница 63: ...e ranges Hi and Low in order to optimize efficiency and general performance including the capability to tolerate auxiliary voltage interruptions dips Oversized components highly resistant to temperature are used For example all capacitors are specified to stand up to 105ºC transformer components are specially designed to stand up to 180ºC the used MOSFET transistor is of very low resistance suppor...

Страница 64: ...esistive material which guarantees the unit s immunity to all kinds of EMI RFI ESD interferences As well an IP52 IEC 529 protection degree against dust and water through the front and with the relay mounted in the panel In order to guarantee safety and preventing access to the unit by unauthorized personnel the front part of the relay has a sealable cover to protect the RS 232 front port and the o...

Страница 65: ...3 4 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 3 3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION 3 HARDWARE 3 Figure 3 4 DRILLING DIMENSIONS DIAGRAM ...

Страница 66: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 3 5 3 HARDWARE 3 3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION 3 Figure 3 5 DIMENSIONS OF THE 19 RACKS 8U HIGH FOR TWO RELAYS ...

Страница 67: ...he appropriate terminal is 6 mm2 AWG 10 The use of twisted pair wire and or shielded is recommended for the CT secondary current Isg The rest of the terminal blocks F and G for I O and H for power supply incorporate high quality connectors with the capacity to withstand a rated current of 15 A at 300 V These terminal blocks admit a cable section of up to 2 54 mm2 AWG 12 The communication boards ha...

Страница 68: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 3 7 3 HARDWARE 3 3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION 3 Figure 3 6 CONNECTORS LOCATION ...

Страница 69: ...NICATION MODULES The transformers module with the VTs and CTs is already connected to a female connector screwed to the case that incorporates shorting bars in the current inputs so that it can be extracted without the need to short circuit the currents externally It is very important for safety reasons not to change or swift the terminals for CTs and VTs TYPE OF COMMUNICATION CONNECTOR RS485 CAN ...

Страница 70: ...9 3 HARDWARE 3 3 MECHANICAL DESCRIPTION 3 A grounded antistatic wristband must be used when manipulating the module in order to avoid electrostatic discharges that may cause damage to the electronic components Figure 3 9 REAR TERMINALS LOCATION ...

Страница 71: ... the number selected for option F for models including boards 4 and 5 3 4 2 DIGITAL INPUTS WITH TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION The Option 2 I O board includes two groups of 4 inputs with one common in terminals F9 to F10 It also includes 6 auxiliary outputs in terminals F19 to F30 with normally open contacts and two current sensing latching outputs F31 F33 and F34 F36 Besides there are 2 groups of input...

Страница 72: ...necessary to extract the board switch the jumper to the selected position as indicated on Figure 3 10 FIBER CABLE SELECTION and insert the board again As with any other relay manipulation the relay power supply must be removed and the operation must be performed only by skilled personnel The default port selected by switch is 10 100 TX in factory configuration The switch selects between cable 10 1...

Страница 73: ...B is the available optical power for a fiber optic link to accommodate fiber cable losses plus losses due to in line connectors splices optical switches and to provide margin for link aging and unplanned losses due to cable plant reconfiguration and repair OPB DB FIBER OPTIC CABLE LENGTH KM 62 5 125 μm 50 125 μm 11 4 8 0 10 9 7 4 0 3 10 5 7 1 0 5 9 6 6 2 1 0 8 5 5 3 1 5 7 3 4 3 2 0 6 3 3 2 5 ...

Страница 74: ...650 Setup software interface 4 1 2 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE OVERVIEW This software package uses ModBus protocol and it is designed to communicate with a single relay at a time GE offers different communication software packages such as GE POWER which can be used to communicate simultaneously with several relays EnerVista 650 Setup software provides an easy way to configure monitor and manage a...

Страница 75: ...a visual display of power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events 4 1 2 5 FIRMWARE UPGRADES The firmware of a F650 device can be upgraded locally or remotely via the EnerVista 650 Setup software The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista 650 Setup Help file under the topic Upgrading Firmware Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules features ...

Страница 76: ...ERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 4 1 3 MAIN SCREEN The EnerVista 650 Setup software main window supports the following primary display components Title bar Main menu bar Main icon bar Working area Status bar Figure 4 1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP MAIN SCREEN Working Area Title Working Area Title ...

Страница 77: ...e or even in worst cases the relay and or the computer could result damaged by overvoltages For on line working previously ensure that all relay communication parameters such as baudrate slave ModBus address etc match the computer settings Figure 4 2 COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS MENU The Communication computer screen is divided in several subsections Computer settings Main communication parameters for...

Страница 78: ...P this option selects ModBus TCP IP communication mode for communication through the Ethernet port In this case the top right window will show the typical parameters to be programmed IP address port address and unit identifier in the MODBUS TCP SETUP section MODEM this option displays the parameter to set in case of using a modem for the communication such as Phone number Time out sec init command...

Страница 79: ... EnerVista 650 Setup Open a 650 file File Open menu Modify Settings and relay configuration Is it necessary to program additional logic Launch the Logic Configuration tool in EnerVista 650 Setup Setpoint Logic Configuration Create new or modify the existing logic File Open Project Compile and save logic file pep and drawing design aut in Logic Configuration tool Exit PLC Graphic Editor and save th...

Страница 80: ...PLC Editor Contents Relay configuration file containing all elements Settings input output and LEDs configuration graphic display configuration etc Equations corresponding to the logic created and compiled in the PLC Editor PLC project file containing the necessary information relative to the relay model logic libraries included in the project lib graphic file name aut etc PLC Project file contain...

Страница 81: ... Launch the Logic Configuration tool in EnerVista 650 Setup Setpoint Logic Configuration Create new or modify the existing logic File Open Project Compile Run Compile and save logic file pep and drawing design aut in Logic Configuration tool File Save Project Send logic to relay Run Send Equations to Relay and Exit PLC Graphic Editor Is the relay completely configured Save all settings configurati...

Страница 82: ... transfer to relay Connect with the relay Communications Computer Connect with the relay Communications Computer Send settings and configuration from file Launch 650 Logic equations editor Setpoint Logic Configuration Open the created PLC project File Open Project Compile the project Run Compile Now the logic virtual outputs can be sent directly to relay Run Send Equations to Relay Texts of virtua...

Страница 83: ...RUCTURE FILE SETPOINT ACTUAL OPERATIONS COMMUNICATION IEC 61850 CONFIGURAT OR SECURITY VIEW HELP New Product Setup Front Panel NA Computer Login user Traces Instruction Manual Open System Setup Status NA Modem Change Password ModBus Memory Map GE Multilin on the web Save Protection Elements Metering NA Troubleshooting User Management Languages About EnerVista 650 Setup Save As Control Elements Inp...

Страница 84: ...ings and configuration file Close Close the opened 650 file in EnerVista 650 Setup Config File 650 Converter Tool to convert the 650 files from one version to another Compare to settings file Compare online unit or opened settings file to another settings file Properties File properties for 650 Get info from relay Retrieve the 650 settings and relay configuration compiled equations from the relay ...

Страница 85: ...to fully program the unit The enabled menus in the EnerVista 650 Setup program are File Setpoint Actual Communication View and Help The off line mode displays the File Setpoint Actual Communication Security View and Help submenus to program the unit The Actual values submenus are for structure purposes only Values are not refreshed while the relay is not communicating The Save as and Close submenu...

Страница 86: ... select the version and model to be converted to It is possible to change the model type FXGX using the conversion tool It must be taken into account that part of the logic can be readjusted to fit the new input and output boards selection Notice also that the external wiring of inputs and outputs board are different for type 1 2 4 and 5 4 1 7 3 PROPERTIES When this option is selected the program ...

Страница 87: ...options and settings for the printing device b PRINT PREVIEW Option to preview the whole settings and configuration file 650 in paper format to be printed as shown in Figure 4 8 Figure 4 8 PRINT PREVIEW OF SETTINGS FILE c PRINT In this option the program will print the relay configuration using the PC default active printer on port COMx or LPT This option is active only in off line mode in file ed...

Страница 88: ... INTERFACE 4 4 1 7 5 COMPARE TO SETTINGS FILE This tool provides automatic comparison of two different configuration files or online unit to one settings file Open the source 650 file and select the version and model to be compared to Figure 4 9 COMPARE TO SETTINGS FILE It will appear the Figure 4 9 with the differences ...

Страница 89: ...ol Events Switchgear Inputs Virtual Inputs Operations and HMI Whole relay configuration with internal relay signals or user definable ones as logic virtual outputs Logic Configuration Logic configuration graphic editor PLC Editor It is a PLC Project file editor that contains all the internal drawings used to make the logic virtual outputs based on IEC 61131 3 standard Functional block diagram FDB ...

Страница 90: ...ly available for procome models 5 IEC 870 5 103 Com port slave number and synchronization time out for IEC 103 protocol SYSTEM SETUP General Settings This screen describes and enables the settings of the power system where the relay will operate Some of these settings will be used only for metering values presentation purposes however some of them apply directly to the sampling and analog digital ...

Страница 91: ...tive ground current Measured from 5th current input Negative Sequence Current All Negative sequence overcurrent grouped functions Voltage Elements All voltage grouped functions for phases neutral ground and auxiliary voltage Power Forward power directional power and wattmetric ground fault High and Low grouped protection functions PHASE CURRENT Phase TOC High Phase time overcurrent high level 51PH...

Страница 92: ...s can be used in either single setting group default mode all units can operate simultaneously or three setting groups in this mode protection units are grouped in three independent tables with only one of them active at a given time Protection element grouping involves only Protection elements together with broken conductor detection and over and under frequency which are usually considered as co...

Страница 93: ...virtual inputs or in Self reset mode 32 self reset virtual inputs Remote Comms This menu allows configuring remote inputs coming from other devices through GSSE messages Available for IEC61850 6 models only CONTACT I O Board F Board located in first slot always connected Board G Board located in second slot depends on model definition If model is type G0 there is no board in second slot Board H Bo...

Страница 94: ...lows configuration of type of contacts opening and closing time contact assignation and text for events related to switchgear There are 64 pre established events for switchgear which correspond to opening closing Error01 and Error11 of the 16 programmable switchgear elements Remote outputs Up to 32 DNA bits and 64 user St bits to be transmitted to remote devices over CAN using GSSE messages Inputs...

Страница 95: ...FACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES SETTINGS ACTUAL VALUES 4 The following figures show an example of the default factory configuration for F650 The F650 has no default factory configuration but a possible example could be the following Figure 4 10 RELAY CONFIGURATION Figure 4 11 HMI CONFIGURATION ...

Страница 96: ...ion 4 1 5 File description pep Header for Logic project PLC project file containing the necessary information relative to the relay model logic libraries included in the project lib graphic file name aut etc aut PLC Project file containing all the drawings used by the logic required by 650 relay based on IEC 61131 3 standard Functional block diagram FDB lib User programmable logic objects Library ...

Страница 97: ...4 24 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 4 1 ENERVISTA 650 SETUP SOFTWARE INTERFACE 4 HUMAN INTERFACES SETTINGS ACTUAL VALUES 4 Figure 4 13 CLOCK ...

Страница 98: ... and interlocks are fulfilled Breaker Breaker status open closed or undefined The rest of the status signals corresponding to the switchgear XX configured as breaker are in the Status Switchgear Status Switchgear XX menu Protection Status of all the protection units in the device Control Elements Status of all the control units available in the device Protection Summary This screen shows a complet...

Страница 99: ...nd units Voltage Protection status signals pickups and operations for all voltage functions undervoltage overvoltage neutral overvoltage negative sequence overvoltage and auxiliary under and over voltage Power Protection status signals pickups and operations for forward directional and wattmetric ground fault high and low power units and power factor status Power values for 32N High and Low functi...

Страница 100: ...sequence components Frequency Line and Bus frequencies INPUTS OUTPUTS Contact Inputs Status of digital inputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay model Contact Output Status Status of digital outputs in the Relay for each board according to the relay model Contact Outputs Operates Status activated or not of the variables used to operate a contact output To configure these signals go...

Страница 101: ...ay with their corresponding texts which must be different from the default text Op_X not configured Table 4 23 GENERAL OVERVIEW OF OPERATIONS MENU Options enabled only in On line mode are marked as Options enabled only in Off line mode are marked as RECORDS Event recorder Retrieval and visualization of snapshot event all and new control events and alarm panel By serial or Ethernet ModBus RTU or TC...

Страница 102: ...erform reading or writing in ModBus addresses for verifying communications and access to different positions in the ModBus memory map Only available if the communication has already been established Go to Communication Troubleshooting An example is provided in Figure 4 14 COMMUNICATION Computer Menu to start communication with the relay Modem Menu to set modem communication parameters only availab...

Страница 103: ...re is related to the relay internal program designed by GE Multilin which performs the protection and control functions and which is run by the relay main microprocessor Upgrade operating system Serial and Ethernet connection Go to Communications Upgrade operating system This option allows the user to update the relay operative system The operative system or OS is the program that supports the fir...

Страница 104: ... logic equations This file can be retrieved from the relay using the File Get info from relay option in EnerVista 650 Setup through serial or Ethernet communication File Send info to relay option stores this 650 file in the relay pep aut and lib files contain the logic configuration projects necessary to modify the logic virtual outputs in the relay These files can be stored in the relay using the...

Страница 105: ...al English only and can be obtained from EnerVista 650 Setup program Table 4 26 GENERAL OVERVIEW OF VIEW MENU Options enabled only in On line mode are marked as Options enabled only in Off line mode are marked as 4 1 14 HELP MENU OVERVIEW Complete instructions manual and data about EnerVista 650 Setup release Table 4 27 GENERAL OVERVIEW OF HELP MENU SECURITY Login User Log on menu for EnerVista 65...

Страница 106: ...s the front RS232 Communications port and the commands buttons that can be sealed The following figure shows the HMI in F650 Figure 4 15 HMI INTERFACE Ergonomic programmable keys Shuttle control for easy navigation ESC key built in ENTER function and audio feedback Local Remote Off pushbutton with LEDs HMI Interface Graphic 16x40 or text 4x20 LCD display Fluorescent backlight to improve visibility...

Страница 107: ...16 lines with 40 characters each 128x240 pixels being B the ordering code option for the text display model basic and M the code for the mimic display graphical The boot code and firmware versions can be seen in the relay text main screen this screen is the default screen in the text menu for all models After the text F650 appears the relay firmware version 3 44in the example and between brackets ...

Страница 108: ...et The latched conditions can also be reset via communications using the LED reset input to configure this signal go to Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection elements LED RESET INPUT By default this LED reset input signal is set to LEDS RESET operation 4 2 3 PUSHBUTTONS The front panel provides Push buttons keypad 5 user programmable plus ESC ESCAPE non configurable shuttle key or shuttle key fo...

Страница 109: ...ser This button can be used for closing the user programmable switchgear It is fully programmable by the user F1 User programmable F2 User programmable F3 User programmable Up Key Used for selecting menus submenus settings Down Key Used for selecting menus submenus and change values of settings Enter Key Press key to enter to submenus or to change values Escape key Press key to exit from menus Res...

Страница 110: ...us operation inhibited for maintenance and safety can be reach pressing the commands pushbutton during several seconds local remote off sequence The local remote off sequence can be also available through communications see chapter 5 8 with a configurable signal that can be set in the Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection Elements screen 4 2 4 FRONT PORT AND COVER SEALING SYSTEM Figure 4 20 show...

Страница 111: ...om the standby screen default main screen The default main screen can be accessed pressing ESC key till it appears In all the navigation press the shuttle key to select the desired header display top level menu Each press of the shuttle key advances through the main heading pages as illustrated below To return to previous menus press the ESC key To move inside the top level menu without changing t...

Страница 112: ...n device Press shuttle key or enter keyto enter next level Move Up Down to select submenu Press ESC to return to previous level Change Settings Menu that allows changing all protection and control settings available in device Inputs and outputs settings relay configuration and logic configuration are not available in HMI only via EnerVista 650 Setup software Press shuttle key or enter key to enter...

Страница 113: ...ENU Front Panel LEDs Status Operation Bits Breaker Protection Protection Blocks Phase Current Neutral Current Ground Current Sens Ground Current Neg Seq Current Thermal Model Voltage Power Control Elements Frequency Synchrocheck Autoreclose Breaker Failure VT Fuse Failure Broken Conductor Setting Groups Locked Rotor Pulse Counters Analog Comparators Load Encroachment Switchgear Status Switchgear 1...

Страница 114: ...gation will be performed the same for all the menus in Actual Values Once the last sublevel is reached move up and down to visualize the actual values selected Metering Primary Values Current Voltage Power Energy Demand Secondary Values Current Voltage Power Frequency Inputs Outputs Contact Inputs Board F Board G Board H Board J Cont Output St Board F Board G Board H Board J Cont Output Op Board F...

Страница 115: ...ntifier in the example PH IOC1 HIGH A is the pickup signal for the first instantaneous overcurrent function level high for phase A Third line Status of the displayed actual value Fourth Line Relative position in the menu it is the first value of 114 Figure 4 22 ACTUAL VALUES SCREEN DATA In the Actual Values menus are different types of data each type of data will display its particular status type...

Страница 116: ...creen press ESC To select different snapshot events to be displayed press the up down keys orrotate the shuttle key to select the snapshot event and then press the enter shuttle key to enter the metering screen Press esc to exit the metering screen and return to snapshot events menu Figure 4 23 shows an example of snapshot events navigation Press enter shuttle key from the default main screen and ...

Страница 117: ...s the enter shuttle key for this screen to disappear The HMI will not allow to perform any other operation until the screen is acknowledged In the event of several consecutive faults the HMI will always show the most recent fault and the user will need to acknowledge all of them up to a maximum of ten faults In the second option viewing the fault reports in the menu available in the HMI the Fault ...

Страница 118: ...ault type distance and date and time Second screen with metering data for that fault record All this data is a summary from the fault report file that can be retrieved via EnerVista 650 Setup software Figure 4 24 FAULT REPORT NAVIGATION IN HMI Possible fault types are as follows GROUND Ground faults AG phase A to ground ABG phase AB to ground BG phase BG to ground BCG phase BCG to ground CG phase ...

Страница 119: ... is reached move up and down to visualize the settings selected Table 4 30 GENERAL OVERVIEW OF VIEW CHANGE SETTINGS MAIN MENU MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIRST LEVEL SECOND LEVEL THIRD LEVEL Product Setup Communication Serial Ports Ethernet Ethernet 1 Ethernet 2 ModBus Protocol DNP3 Slave Available for standard and IEC61850 models DNP3 Slave 1 DNP3 Slave 2 DNP3 Slave 3 IEC 870 5 104 Available for standard ...

Страница 120: ...utral Dir Neutral Dir 1 Neutral Dir 2 Neutral Dir 3 Ground Current Ground TOC Ground TOC 1 Ground TOC 2 Ground TOC 3 Ground IOC Ground IOC 1 Ground IOC 2 Ground IOC 3 Ground Dir Ground Dir 1 Ground Dir 2 Ground Dir 3 Sens Ground Curr Sens Ground TOC Sens Ground TOC 1 Sens Ground TOC 2 Sens Ground TOC 3 Sens Ground IOC Sens Ground IOC 1 Sens Ground IOC 2 Sens Ground IOC 3 Isolated Gnd IOC Isolated ...

Страница 121: ...ow 1 Neutral OV Low 2 Neutral OV Low 3 Neg Seq OV Neg Seq OV 1 Neg Seq OV 2 Neg Seq OV 3 Auxiliary OV Auxiliary OV 1 Auxiliary OV 2 Auxiliary OV 3 Auxiliary UV Auxiliary UV 1 Auxiliary UV 2 Auxiliary UV 3 Power Forward Power Forward Power 1 Forward Power 2 Forward Power 3 Directional Power Directional Power 1 Directional Power 2 Directional Power 3 Watt Gnd Flt High Watt Gnd Flt High 1 Watt Gnd Fl...

Страница 122: ... Overfrequency 2 Overfrequency 3 Synchrocheck Autoreclose Breaker Failure VT Fuse Failure Broken Conductor Broken Conductor 1 Broken Conductor 2 Broken Conductor 3 Locked Rotor Locked Rotor 1 Locked Rotor 2 Locked Rotor 3 Fq Rate of Change Fq Rate of Change 1 Fq Rate of Change 2 Fq Rate of Change 3 Load Encroachment Load Encroachment 1 Load Encroachment 2 Load Encroachment 3 MAIN SETTINGS MENU FIR...

Страница 123: ...fter selecting the appropriate value press again the enter shuttle key to fix that value To save the new settings go to the end of the menu pressing down key or rotating the shuttle key right and select the menu Press Enter to save settings When pressing the shuttle key inside this menu the new settings will be saved Select the menu Change settings and press the enter shuttle key to enter in the n...

Страница 124: ...be modified pressing up down key or rotating the shuttle key after selecting the desired value press again the enter shuttle key to store the value Year Date Day Month Year Time Hour Minutes Seconds After storing the value for Year Month will appear between brackets and can be modified Month Date Day Month Year Time Hour Minutes Seconds After storing the value for Month Day will appear between bra...

Страница 125: ... Example of commands operations executions via HMI Press the enter shuttle key in the menu commands when it is selected in the display All the previously configured commands will be displayed Press up down keys or rotate the shuttle key move through the available commands Press ESC to return to previous level Press enter shuttle key to pre select the operation to be executed When the message Push ...

Страница 126: ...s menu there are three types of functionality Login For entering the password either for settings or commands and enable access to settings or commands Once entering the password the relay is no longer password protected and access is enabled to settings modification or commands execution Logout Once the necessary setting changes or operation commands have been executed the user can log out so tha...

Страница 127: ...mands the user must logout Logout Pwd Settings or Logout Pwd Commands For safety reasons if the user does not log out the relay will do it automatically 15 minutes after the last keypad action d CHANGING THE PASSWORD CHANGE PWD COMMANDS To set a password in the relay both for settings and commands the corresponding menu must be accessed inside the Password menu Change Pwd Settings or Change Pwd Co...

Страница 128: ... This option selects as main screen the relay logotype including the firmware and boot code versions the relay model and the communication parameters for local port COM2 Figure 4 28 DEFAULT LOGOTYPE SCREEN Metering This option shows a Metering screen including the phase and ground currents as well as phase to phase voltage and zero sequence voltage values all of them in primary values Figure 4 29 ...

Страница 129: ...can be displayed in French or in English only by changing the language setting in HMI It is necessary to switch off and on the relay to start working with the new language configuration in the relay In EnerVista 650 Setup it is possible to select the language for the software View Languages Example of language selection in HMI Press the enter shuttle key to enter the select language menu Depending...

Страница 130: ...n section 4 2 5 in this manual Intro Next Pressing the enter shuttle key the user access the next graphical screen which in this case corresponds to the primary metering values screen Select Once the different switchgear elements to be operated have been configured using EnerVista 650 Setup the user will be able to operate them from the graphic display If a single line diagram has been previously ...

Страница 131: ...Primary V1 Primary Phase B Reactive Pwr Bus Frequency Primary Phasor Ic Primary V2 Primary Phase B Apparent Pwr Vx Primary Phasor Ig Primary Vab Primary Phase B Real Pwr Pos MVarhour Freeze Phasor Isg Primary Vbc Primary Phase C Reactive Pwr NegMVarhour Freeze Phasor In Primary Vca Primary Phase C Apparent Pwr PosMWatthour Freeze RMS Ia Primary Vn Primary Phase C Real Pwr Neg MWatthour Freeze RMS ...

Страница 132: ... options at the bottom of the screen next prev reload details At To access the different options in the snapshot events graphic menu the user must move the cursor from up to down or from left to right The selected option will be displayed in upper case and between brackets To access the selected option the user must press again the enter shuttle key NEXT The user accesses the next available graphi...

Страница 133: ...r shuttle key A new metering screen will be displayed containing the primary metering values in the snapshot event such as Once inside the Metering screen a new legend will be shown for each event Intro or ESC Prev U D L R Scroll this legend indicates that by pressing ESC or the shuttle key the system will return to the Event Detail screen and pressing the up down key or rotating the shuttle key t...

Страница 134: ...ws Esc Out At Enter Tag event Esc Out At The relative event marking is eliminated and the system returns to the general events screen Enter Tag event If the user places the cursor on a different event by pressing the up down key or rotating the shuttle key left or right pressing the enter shuttle key will change the relative mark to that new event 4 2 6 4 NEW EVENTS SCREEN This screen shows the ne...

Страница 135: ...tatus active ON or inactive OFF In the previous example the produced alarm is the change to local of the execution of operations OPERATIONS IN LOCAL MODE the date and time when this event has been produced and its status ON The bottom of the screen shows the legend that indicates how to navigate through the different options available in the screen ESC Prev Enter Next ESC Prev Pressing the ESC key...

Страница 136: ...The format of this screen is shown on the figure below The first line shows the name of the screen I O Cards followed by the type and description of the board where the cursor is located which will appear between selection marks and blinking Figure 4 36 INPUTS OUTPUTS GENERAL SCREEN The navigation legend on this screen is as follows Esc Prev Enter Menu Chg Card Esc Prev This option returns to the ...

Страница 137: ...s to the I O menu next view test input test output Chg Card Pressing the up down key or Moving the shuttle key to the left or right provides access to the status of inputs outputs for the different boards available in the relay TEST INPUT This option allows testing the input activation in emulation mode The displayed screen is similar to the viewing screen but in this case the user can operate the...

Страница 138: ...howing that this is an output emulation mode The first relay output will appear blinking and between brackets the user can select a different output by pressing the up down key or rotating the shuttle key When the enter shuttle key is pressed the selected output will be activated Navigation through this screen is indicated by the following legend Esc Exit Text Enter Chg Output Esc Exit Text The ES...

Страница 139: ... logger and metering values provided by the relay through the web In order to access the different functions provided by the web server the user must simply click on the list name on the left side of the screen The web server for version 1 70 and higher ones allows the user to visualize the different web server screen languages English French Spanish and Russian by pressing the language button on ...

Страница 140: ...e information provided in this screen includes first the relative event index the lowest index corresponding to the most recent event next the event text that shows the reason for the event its status active ON or inactive OFF and finally the date and time when the event was produced The bottom of the screen shows a Metering screen clicking on one of the events the associated metering values will ...

Страница 141: ...red in the Control Events screen inside the Relay Configuration menu of EnerVista 650 Setup Figure 4 40 CONTROL EVENTS SCREEN Unlike the case of Snapshot events in this screen the highest index corresponds to the most recent event The information provided is the control event index the text that has been associated to such event when configured its status active ON or inactive OFF and its date and...

Страница 142: ...TTINGS ACTUAL VALUES 4 3 WEB SERVER 4 4 3 4 ALARMS The alarms screen provides access to alarms configured in the relay As in the case of snapshot events and control events this screen allows only to view the alarms but not to acknowledge them Figure 4 41 ALARMS SCREEN ...

Страница 143: ...4 42 OSCILLOGRAPHY SCREEN If the user clicks on the oscillo record he wants to retrieve the window on the right will show a description of the record header indicating its date time and the most relevant parameters of the record Once a record is selected it is required to press the Download button The system will then open a window to allow saving the files in Comtrade format in the PC hard drive ...

Страница 144: ...fety warning message Figure 4 44 FAULT REPORT SCREEN The information provided in this screen includes the date and time when the fault was registered fault calculations such as distance to the fault type of fault date and time and the line parameters as well as the recloser and breaker status during the fault This screen shows also prefault and fault voltage and current primary values At the top o...

Страница 145: ... 4 4 3 7 DATA LOGGER The data logger screen allows viewing the data logger first and last value retrieval date and allows downloading the data record files in Comtrade format by pressing the Download option Stored files can be viewed later using any Comtrade format viewer Figure 4 45 DATA LOGGER SCREEN ...

Страница 146: ...650 Digital Bay Controller 4 73 4 HUMAN INTERFACES SETTINGS ACTUAL VALUES 4 3 WEB SERVER 4 4 3 8 METERING This screen includes the 53 primary metering values provided by the relay display Figure 4 46 METERING SCREEN ...

Страница 147: ...4 74 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 4 3 WEB SERVER 4 HUMAN INTERFACES SETTINGS ACTUAL VALUES 4 ...

Страница 148: ...COME Available for procome models only IEC 870 5 103 Available for IEC 870 5 103 models only ModBus User Map Fault Report Oscillography Data Logger Demand System Setup General settings Flex Curves Breaker Breaker Settings Breaker Maintenance Switchgear Time Settings Protection Elements Phase Current Phase TOC High Phase TOC Low Phase IOC High Phase IOC Low Phase Directional Thermal Model Neutral C...

Страница 149: ...rectional Power Watt Gnd Flt High Watt Gnd Flt Low Control Elements Setting Group Underfrequency Overfrequency Synchrocheck Autoreclose Breaker Failure VT Fuse Failure Broken Conductor Locked Rotor Pulse Counters Analog Comparator Frequency rate of change Load Encroachment Input Outputs Contact I O Board F Board G Board H Board J Force Outputs Remote Comms Available for IEC61850 models only Virtua...

Страница 150: ...endix B in this manual Table 5 4 MODBUS PROTOCOL SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION SETTINGS SERIAL PORTS Name Default Value Step Range COM1 Baud Rate 19200 N A 300 115200 COM2 Baud Rate 19200 N A 300 115200 COM1Parity NONE N A NONE ODD EVEN COM2Parity NONE N A NONE ODD EVEN PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION SETTINGS NETWORK ETHERNET NETWORK ETHERNET 1 NETWORK ETHERNET 2 Name Default Value Step Range ...

Страница 151: ...ddr Client3 Oct4 0 1 0 255 IP Addr Client4 Oct1 0 1 0 255 IP Addr Client4 Oct2 0 1 0 255 IP Addr Client4 Oct3 0 1 0 255 IP Addr Client4 Oct4 0 1 0 255 IP Addr Client5 Oct1 0 1 0 255 IP Addr Client5 Oct2 0 1 0 255 IP Addr Client5 Oct3 0 1 0 255 IP Addr Client5 Oct4 0 1 0 255 TCP UDP Port 20000 1 0 65535 Unsol Resp Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Unsol Resp TimeOut 5 1 0 60 Unsol Resp Max Ret...

Страница 152: ...erver is used To use SNTP in unicast mode Server IP Oct1 4 must be set to the SNTP NTP server IP address Once this address is set and the Function setting is UNICAST the F650 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP NTP server Since many time values are obtained and averaged it generally takes forty seconds until the F650 clock is synchronized with the SNTP NTP server It may take up to one min...

Страница 153: ...cast mode the F650 tries to send multicast messages up to five minutes before signalling an SNTP FAIL state The F650 relay does not support the multicast mode of SNTP functionality 5 2 1 7 PROCOME Communication settings for PROCOME protocol For more detail information go to APPENDIX E in this manual When NONE is selected in the comm port setting the protocol is not enabled The com1 selection enabl...

Страница 154: ...ords selectable from the complete relay ModBus map from the ModBus user map For more detailed information go to appendix B in this manual Table 5 8 MODBUS USER MAP SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP MODBUS USER MAP Name Default Value Step Range Address 00 0000 0000 FFFF Address 01 0000 0000 FFFF Address 254 0000 0000 FFFF Address 255 0000 0000 FFFF ...

Страница 155: ...report when the FAULT REPORT TRIGG is activated Positive sequence impedance module Pos Seq Module Value in ohms of the line positive sequence impedance module Positive sequence impedance Angle Pos Seq Angle Value in degrees of the line positive sequence angle Zero sequence impedance module Zero Seq Module Value in ohms of the line zero sequence impedance module Zero sequence impedance Angle Zero S...

Страница 156: ...t Record Number Clicking on the View header button the system will show the header of the record selected at Select Record Clicking on the Download button the file is retrieved and saved in a folder selected by the user The file name is FLTxxx TXT where xxx is the corresponding record number The fault report retrieval can be done using serial communication ModBus RTU or Ethernet ftp tftp Fault rep...

Страница 157: ...7 VB or VBC channel depending on the selected configuration Wye or Delta at Setpoint System Setup General settings Phase VT Connection Analog 8 VC or VCA channel depending on the selected configuration Wye or Delta at Setpoint System Setup General settings Phase VT Connection Analog 9 VN or VX channel depending on the selected configuration zero sequence measured or busbar voltage at Setpoint Syst...

Страница 158: ...uring a time longer than the associated 1 Mbyte of memory the relay will stop storing the oscillography in RAM memory until the complete record has been saved in non volatile memory The oscillography module will be reset once the data has been completely stored in Flash memory and the TRIGGER OSCILLO state is deactivated Snapshot Events This setting enables or disables snapshot event generation fo...

Страница 159: ...cord s capacity will store post fault information NUMBER OF TRIGGERS This is the number of the most recent oscillography record stored in the relay The record is stored in COMTRADE format The range is 0 to 999 CYCLES PER RECORD This state displays the number of cycles that will be stored in each oscillography record Although the number of cycles can be a decimal number the record will represent on...

Страница 160: ...xx is the corresponding record number The oscillography retrieval can be done using serial communication ModBus RTU or Ethernet ftp tftp 5 2 5 DATA LOGGER The F650 data logger can store information of up to 16 analog channels among all channels available in the relay with a sampling rate selectable by setting The memory of the data logger is fixed 64 Kilobytes Two bytes are needed per channel The ...

Страница 161: ...d on the number of channels selected 5 2 5 3 DATA LOGGER FILES FORMAT AND RETRIEVAL File Retrieval Data logger files can be retrieved using the EnerVista 650 Setup software or the web server at http relay IP address For obtaining the data logger files using the EnerVista 650 Setup software the user must access Actual Records Data Logger The top of the window shows the date when the oldest sample w...

Страница 162: ...r Current and Power methods can be chosen separately Settings are provided to disable certain measuring techniques These techniques are used by many utilities for statistical or control purposes PRIMARY DEMAND VALUES STEP IA RMS KA IB RMS KA IC RMS KA IG RMS KA ISG RMS KA I2 KA Three phase active power W MW Three phase reactive power VAR MVAr Apparent power VA MVA DEMAND CALCULATED VALUES DEMAND I...

Страница 163: ...igned as DEMAND TRIGGER INP This input is set at Setpoint Relay configuration Protection Elements Snapshot Events This setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the demand element 5 2 6 2 DEMAND CALCULATION METHODS a CALCULATION METHOD 1 THERMAL EXPONENTIAL This method simulates the action of an analog peak recording thermal demand meter The relay measures the magnitude for eac...

Страница 164: ... in the DEMAND INTERVAL setting The calculation will be made every second and the demand value will be the average of all values produced during the time interval The time interval is chosen in the DEMAND INTERVAL setting The interval demand value will be shown once this time has expired If for example the setting indicates 15 minutes for integration the demand value update will be made every 15 m...

Страница 165: ...and calculation Figure 5 1 RESPONSE TO THE DIFFERENT DEMAND METHODS 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 1 2 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time minutes Input 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 1 2 0 5 10 15 20 25 3 Time minutes Rolling demand Demand 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 1 2 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time minutes Block interval Demand 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 1 2 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time minutes Demand ...

Страница 166: ...Demanded maximeter it stores the Maximum demand value until a demand reset is issued DEMAND Y DATE Date of the Maximum demand value Being Y the power considered in each case NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP DEMAND IA 0 000 KA DEMAND IA MAX 0 000 KA DEMAND IA DATE 01 Jan 2000 00 00 00 000 DEMAND IB 0 000 KA DEMAND IB MAX 0 000 KA DEMAND IB DATE 01 Jan 2000 00 00 00 000 DEMAND IC 0 000 KA DEMAND IC MAX 0 000...

Страница 167: ...D ASSOCIATED VALUES Besides the previously considered demand measures two states are used for demand control DEMAND TRIGGER INP Bit type state Programmable at Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection Elements in the EnerVista 650 Setup software This signal is used by the Block Interval demand method DEMAND RESET INP Bit type state programmable at Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection Elements in ...

Страница 168: ...all the changes on PLC equations and functions even stopping all the changes in the input output boards so if there is a change in any of the input or output the unit will not show this change until the unit has been set again in ready mode For example if an output is closed and the unit goes to out of service state the output will be kept closed even though the state that makes it to close change...

Страница 169: ... Limiting 55 o Voltage Auxiliary OV 59X Voltage Unbalance 60V Phase UV 27 Neutral OV High 59NH Neutral OV Low 59NL Neg Seq OV 47 Auxiliary UV 27X Phase OV 59 o Current IS Ground IOC 50IG Phase Dir 67P Phase IOC Low 50PL Neutral IOC 50N Neg Seq TOC 46 Neg Seq Dir 67I2 Ground Dir 67g Phase TOC High 51PH Phase TOC Low 51PL Senstv Gnd TOC 51sg Senstv Gnd IOC 50sg Breaker Failure 50BF Neutral Dir 67n N...

Страница 170: ...Failure VTFF Watt Gnd Flt Low 32NL Watt Gnd Flt High 32NH Data Logger Comparator Switchgear Breaker When the Out of Service status goes to ON or the setting has been changed to Enabled the ready led will also change to red color Be careful if ready led is linked to an output because the output will not change its state To set an output to ready state see factory default Logic Configuration Take no...

Страница 171: ...is able to change the operations from local to remote or OFF ON The operator is not able to change the operations from local to remote or OFF 5 3 1 2 2 SETTINGS The unit will be set by the HMI and by 650Pc software as it is shown in the following figure Only if there is a change from Disabled to Enabled Only if there is any change from Enabled to Disabled Only if there is any change from Disabled ...

Страница 172: ...rves are defined by the user in Setpoint System Setup Flex Curves menu in EnerVista 650 Setup User defined flex curves can be selected as an operation curve in all the time overcurrent functions in the relay In the flex curves menu there are 120 points to define a user curve 40 points for reset from 0 to 0 98 times the pickup value and 80 for operate from 1 03 to 20 times the pickup ...

Страница 173: ...values in each case If once the user curve has been configured the user wants to store the information the Flex Curve Exit with Data menu must be selected If the results are not to be saved the Exit without Data option must be selected Now calculated points must be saved in the Flex Curve using the Store option Figure 5 3 FLEXCURVES EDITION SETPOINT SYSTEM SETUP FLEX CURVES FLEX CURVES A FLEX CURV...

Страница 174: ...ximum openings counter will start from zero Maximum Openings in 1 hour This is the maximum number of openings allowed in the relay during one hour once this value is reached the corresponding alarm signal will be activated this value is updated and reset after one hour Snapshot Events This setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the breaker signals The interrupted current lim...

Страница 175: ...at Actual Status Breaker Table 5 24 BREAKER STATUS The signals associated to breaker maintenance can be monitored at Actual Status Records Status Breaker Maintenance and they are as follows Table 5 25 BREAKER MAINTENANCE STATUS SETPOINT SYSTEM SETUP BREAKER BREAKER MAINTENANCE setting Description Name Default Value Step Range KI 2t Counter Phase A KI 2t BKR Ph A Cnt 0 00 0 01 KA 2 s 0 00 9999 99 K...

Страница 176: ...reaker Closing time This signal is configured at Setpoint Relay Configuration Switchgear in the number of switchgear corresponding to the breaker selection SETPOINT SYSTEM SETUP SWITCHGEAR SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE Snapshot Event generation for switchgear 1 Snapshot Events SWGR 1 DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Snapshot Event generation for switchgear 2 Snapshot Events SWGR 2...

Страница 177: ... weekday of the DST from Monday to Sunday DST START DAY INSTAllow to set the start day instance from First Second Third Fourth or Last DST START HOURAllow to set the starting hour of the DST in local time DST STOP MONTHAllow to set the stop month of the DST from January to December DST STOP WEEKDAYAllow to set the stop weekday of the DST from Monday to Sunday DST STOP DAY INSTAllow to set the stop...

Страница 178: ...TOC HIGH 51PH 3 x PHASE TOC LOW 51PL 3 x NEUTRAL TOC 51N 3 x GROUND TOC 51G 3 x SENSITIVE GROUND TOC 51SG Negative sequence overcurrent 3 x NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC 46P Thermal image 3 x THERMAL MODEL 49P DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS 3 x PHASE DIR 67P 3 x NEUTRAL DIR 67N 3 x GROUND DIR 67G 3 x SENSITIVE GROUND DIR 67SG VOLTAGE ELEMENTS Phase under overvoltage 3 x PHASE UV 27P 3 x PHASE OV 59P Zero sequence o...

Страница 179: ...ility for protection ELEMENTS This means that protection elements can be used in either one of the following modes a SINGLE SETTING GROUPS In this operation mode all protection elements can be activated and operated simultaneously b THREE SETTING GROUPS In this mode protection elements are grouped in three independent tables Only one of them will be active at a given time A logic signal e g a digi...

Страница 180: ...1x46P 1x49P 1x49P 1x49P 1x67P 1x67P 1x67P 1x67N 1x67N 1x67N 1x67G 1x67G 1x67G 1x67SG 1x67SG 1x67SG 1x27P 1x27P 1x27P 1x59P 1x59P 1x59P 1x47P 1x47P 1x47P 1x59NH 1x59NH 1x59NH 1x59NL 1x59NL 1x59NL 1x59X 1x59X 1x59X 1x27X 1x27X 1x27X 1x32FP 1x32FP 1x32FP 1x32 1x32 1x32 1x32N High 1x32N High 1x32N High 1x32N Low 1x32N Low 1x32N Low 1x81U 1x81U 1x81U 1x81O 1x81O 1x81O 1 x Broken conductor 1 x Broken co...

Страница 181: ...IGURATION EXAMPLE The example above uses three digital inputs to perform the table selection but it is possible to use any other logic signal in the relay In case of using digital inputs the user can select the setting table activating these digital inputs which could come from the PLC or from a different relay or from an auxiliary switch for adaptive protection This selection of the active group ...

Страница 182: ...y This energy represents the system dissipation capability that is when 100 of energy is reached this means that the tripping time associated to the curve for a certain current value has expired Therefore once the current value has exceeded the pickup value the relay starts increasing the energy variable value If it reaches 100 a trip is produced When the current value falls below 97 of the pickup...

Страница 183: ... 252 10 0 226 817 95 217 36 467 20 017 12 967 9 274 7 092 5 693 4 742 4 065 IEEE Very Inverse 0 5 8 090 3 514 1 471 0 899 0 654 0 526 0 450 0 401 0 368 0 345 1 0 16 179 7 028 2 942 1 798 1 308 1 051 0 900 0 802 0 736 0 689 2 0 32 358 14 055 5 885 3 597 2 616 2 103 1 799 1 605 1 472 1 378 4 0 64 716 28 111 11 769 7 193 5 232 4 205 3 598 3 209 2 945 2 756 6 0 97 074 42 166 17 654 10 790 7 849 6 308 ...

Страница 184: ...ime in seconds Dial multiplying factor I Input current Itap Current pickup value K E constants defined by the standard TRESET reset time in seconds assuming 100 of power capacity and that the reset is activated tr characteristic constant Table 5 32 CONSTANTS FOR IEC CURVES IEC CURVE SHAPE NAME K E tr IEC Curve A IEC Curve A 0 140 0 020 9 7 IEC Curve B IEC Curve B 13 500 1 000 43 2 IEC Curve C IEC ...

Страница 185: ...050 0 040 0 10 6 400 2 667 1 000 0 533 0 333 0 229 0 167 0 127 0 100 0 081 0 20 12 800 5 333 2 000 1 067 0 667 0 457 0 333 0 254 0 200 0 162 0 40 25 600 10 667 4 000 2 133 1 333 0 914 0 667 0 508 0 400 0 323 0 60 38 400 16 000 6 000 3 200 2 000 1 371 1 000 0 762 0 600 0 485 0 80 51 200 21 333 8 000 4 267 2 667 1 829 1 333 1 016 0 800 0 646 1 00 64 000 26 667 10 000 5 333 3 333 2 286 1 667 1 270 1 ...

Страница 186: ...eration time in seconds Dial multiplier setting I Input current Itap Current pickup value A B C D E predefined constants TRESET reset time in seconds tr characteristic constant Table 5 34 CONSTANTS FOR IAC CURVES IAC CURVE SHAPE NAME A B C D E TR IAC Extremely Inverse IAC Ext Inv 0 0040 0 6379 0 6200 1 7872 0 2461 6 008 IAC Very Inverse IAC Very Inv 0 0900 0 7955 0 1000 1 2885 7 9586 4 678 IAC Inv...

Страница 187: ...656 0 269 0 172 0 133 0 113 0 101 0 093 0 087 0 083 1 0 2 901 1 312 0 537 0 343 0 266 0 227 0 202 0 186 0 174 0 165 2 0 5 802 2 624 1 075 0 687 0 533 0 453 0 405 0 372 0 349 0 331 4 0 11 605 5 248 2 150 1 374 1 065 0 906 0 810 0 745 0 698 0 662 6 0 17 407 7 872 3 225 2 061 1 598 1 359 1 215 1 117 1 046 0 992 8 0 23 209 10 497 4 299 2 747 2 131 1 813 1 620 1 490 1 395 1 323 10 0 29 012 13 121 5 374...

Страница 188: ...factor I Input current Ipickup Current pickup setting A B C D E Constants Treset Reset time in seconds assuming a 100 of power capacity and that the reset is activated Tr Characteristic constant The different constants that define the above mentioned curves are Table 5 36 CONSTANTS FOR ANSI CURVES ANSI CURVE SHAPE A B C D E TR ANSI Extremely Inverse 0 0399 0 2294 0 5 3 0094 0 7222 5 67 ANSI Very I...

Страница 189: ...00 18 805 7 951 3 221 2 047 1 559 1 297 1 133 1 020 0 937 0 874 8 00 25 073 10 602 4 295 2 730 2 079 1 729 1 510 1 360 1 250 1 165 10 00 31 341 13 252 5 369 3 412 2 599 2 161 1 888 1 700 1 562 1 457 ANSI Normally inverse 0 50 2 142 0 883 0 377 0 256 0 203 0 172 0 151 0 135 0 123 0 113 1 00 4 284 1 766 0 754 0 513 0 407 0 344 0 302 0 270 0 246 0 226 2 00 8 568 3 531 1 508 1 025 0 814 0 689 0 604 0 ...

Страница 190: ...10 ms 5 4 2 7 RECTIFIER TIME CURVES Rectifier curves are generated from the following formulas where T Operation time in seconds TDM Multiplying factor I Input current Ipickup Pickup current Treset Reset time in seconds assuming a 100 of power capacity and that the reset is activated DIAL CURRENT I ITAP 1 5 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 10 0 0 01 0 444 0 250 0 111 0 063 0 040 0 028 0 020 0 016 0...

Страница 191: ...ion values are between 1 03 and 20 The final curve will be created by means of a linear interpolation from the points defined by the user This is a separate process for the RESET and the OPERATE curve The definition of these points is performed in a separate module from the relay using a configuration program included in the EnerVista 650 Setup which incorporates a graphical environment for viewin...

Страница 192: ...e element incorporates independent block inputs for each phase When the element is blocked the tripping time counter is reset to 0 This feature allows the use of this input to instantaneously reset the protection element timing The PICKUP setting of the element can be dynamically reduced by a VOLTAGE RESTRAINT feature Possible outputs for the protection element logic are the pickup and tripping si...

Страница 193: ...OC HIGH PHASE TOC HIGH 1 PHASE TOC HIGH 2 PHASE TOC HIGH 3 PHASE TOC LOW PHASE TOC LOW 1 PHASE TOC LOW 2 PHASE TOC LOW 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Input type Input PHASOR DFT N A PHASOR RMS Pickup level Pickup Level 1 00 0 01 A 0 05 160 00 Curve shape Curve IEEE Ext Inv N A See list of curves Time Dial TD Multiplier...

Страница 194: ...oller 5 47 5 SETTINGS 5 4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5 The following diagram shows the logic scheme followed by high range and low range time overcurrent elements 51PH and 51PL in the following figure Figure 5 6 TOC ELEMENT LOGIC SCHEME A6632F2 ...

Страница 195: ...he logic outputs for the element are the pickup and trip flags independent for each phase and general pickup and trip flags Table 5 41 PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT ELEMENT SETTINGS The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for these elements SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS PHASE CURRENT PHASE IOC HIGH PHASE IOC HIGH 1 PHASE IOC HIGH 2 PHASE IOC HIGH 3 PHASE IOC L...

Страница 196: ... Controller 5 49 5 SETTINGS 5 4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5 The following figure shows the logic scheme diagram for high range and low range Instantaneous overcurrent elements 50PH 50PL Figure 5 7 PHASE IOC ELEMENTS LOGIC SCHEME A6632F1 ...

Страница 197: ...tting allows selecting the area for the directional element to operate either forward or reverse Block Logic This setting allows selecting either permission or block depending on the logic to be applied in the event of directional element block Polarization Voltage Threshold This is the minimum voltage considered for the direction calculation Under this setting the element will be blocked Snapshot...

Страница 198: ...tional signal will not be activated in a block condition When the Permission option is selected the operation signal will be activated in a block condition Figure 5 8 shows the default configuration for the phase overcurrent block input When the Block logic setting is set as Block this input will be active in case of a block in the directional element avoiding any phase overcurrent trip When the B...

Страница 199: ...ts the operation magnitude phase current and the polarization magnitude phase to phase voltage rotated the angle set in MTA setting which is the torque angle The Polarization type used in the directional element is crossed this means that in case of a fault in phase A the Operation magnitude will be Ia and the polarization magnitude will be Vbc rotated by the torque angle In case of a fault in pha...

Страница 200: ... reverse Operation areas include a safety zone of 5º to each side of the cone This safety cone is applied when the operation direction calculation is performed from initial block conditions When we go from a non trip area to a trip area the safety cone is considered In case we go from a trip area to a non trip area this cone will not be considered and the whole area will be operative This safety c...

Страница 201: ...650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 5 4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS 5 The following figure shows the logic scheme for the phase directional element Figure 5 11 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT LOGIC SCHEME A6632F3 ...

Страница 202: ...TINGS The cooling constant is given in times the heating constant The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for the thermal model elements SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS PHASE CURRENT THERMAL MODEL THERMAL MODEL 1 THERMAL MODEL 2 THERMAL MODEL 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Heating time...

Страница 203: ... neutral current calculated from phase currents Table 5 47 NEUTRAL IOC ELEMENT SETTINGS The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL TOC NEUTRAL TOC 1 NEUTRAL TOC 2 NEUTRAL TOC 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Pickup lev...

Страница 204: ... F650 Digital Bay Controller 5 57 5 SETTINGS 5 4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5 The following figure shows the logic scheme for the neutral Instantaneous overcurrent element Figure 5 12 LOGIC SCHEME FOR NEUTRAL IOC ELEMENT ...

Страница 205: ...nd or current polarization Ip Possible setting values are V0 Voltage polarization Ip Current polarization V0 Ip Voltage or current polarization This allows the element to operate when any of the polarization magnitudes allow operation V0 Ip Voltage and current polarization This allows the element to operate when both polarization magnitudes allow operation If the selected polarization type is V0 I...

Страница 206: ...tages or measured at the input terminals A11 A12 The relay measures 3V0 and rotates 180º internally to obtain 3V0 shows the operation of the zero sequence polarization 3V0 in case of an AG fault In this case the polarization magnitude 3V0 can be calculated from the three phase voltage values or measured through the fourth voltage input Vx In this last case the voltage transformer must be wye conne...

Страница 207: ...ude and the operation magnitude are as follows minimum In current for the element to operate is 50 mA Minimum polarization voltage for the element to operate is set in the Polarization Voltage Threshold setting Minimum polarization current Ip is 5 mA The voltage polarized directional element needs a typical time of 1 cycle 20ms 50Hz to polarize This time must be considered when setting the overcur...

Страница 208: ...ng Table 5 50 OUTPUT SIGNALS MANAGEMENT ACCORDING TO THE POLARIZATION TYPE SETTING Configuration of the required signals for blocking the neutral overcurrent elements from the signals provided by the neutral directional elements is performed at Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection Elements using the inverted operation signals to block the trip as shown in the following example How to block neut...

Страница 209: ...neous or linear Table 5 52 51G ELEMENT SETTINGS The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS VOLTAGE Vo FORWARD Vo Io x 1 MTA REVERSE Vo Io x 1 MTA CURRENT Ip FORWARD Isg Io REVERSE Isg Io Vo Ip FORWARD Vo Io or Isg Io REVERSE Vo Io or Isg Io Vo Ip FORWARD Vo Io and Isg Io REVERSE Vo Io and Isg Io SETPOINT ...

Страница 210: ... as VX If the F650 does not have a synchronism check element then this input can be set as In neutral voltage and it can be used as polarization magnitude for the 67G element AUXILIARY VOLTAGE setting as VN As in the case of a phase directional element this element incorporates a voltage loss logic that allows blocking or permitting the trip by means of a setting Table 5 54 67G ELEMENT SETTINGS Op...

Страница 211: ... of the signals required for blocking the Ground overcurrent elements from the signals provided by the Ground directional element is made at Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection Elements using inverted operation signals to block the trip For example to block the ground time delayed elements GROUND TOC1 BLOCK NOT GROUND DIR1 OP GROUND TOC2 BLOCK NOT GROUND DIR2 OP GROUND TOC3 BLOCK NOT GROUND DI...

Страница 212: ...ble curve And it incorporates a reset time selectable between instantaneous or linear Table 5 58 51SG ELEMENT SETTINGS The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element POLARIZING MODE DIRECTION COMPARED PHASORS VOLTAGE Vo FORWARD Vo Io x 1 MTA REVERSE Vo Io x 1 MTA CURRENT Ip FORWARD Isg Io REVERSE Isg Io Vo Ip FORWARD Vo Io or Isg Io REVERSE Vo Io or I...

Страница 213: ...e snapshot event generation for this element 5 4 6 3 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT ELEMENT FOR UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS 50IG The operation of this element is similar to sensitive ground overcurrent elements the difference is that in this case 3I0 current is capacitive and uses very reduced magnitudes 0 5 10 A primary values The operation characteristic is shown on figure Figure 5 14 where Vh Vl Ih and Il ar...

Страница 214: ... L magnitudes The 50IG element can be supervised by directional element 67SG Using the relay input magnitudes In and Vn if the point defined by In Vn is inside the operation area and if the directional element if directional supervision is set allows it the element picks up and the set delay time starts counting down If a directional block appears during the countdown the element is reset After th...

Страница 215: ... voltage Positive angles mean counter clockwise rotation and negative angles mean clockwise The polarization magnitude once rotated defines the MTA line Vn rotated by this angle points to the semi plane that corresponds to a Reverse fault Vn rotated this angle points to the semi plane that corresponds to a Forward fault Operation Direction Direction This setting indicates the Direction for which t...

Страница 216: ...nd overcurrent elements from the signals provided by the sensitive ground directional elements is performed at Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection Elements This is done using the inverted operation signals to block the trip as shown in the following example For example to block sensitive Ground time overcurrent elements use the following signals SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK NOT SENS GND DIR1 OP SENS GN...

Страница 217: ...hese protection elements can be used in multiple applications such as Undervoltage protection for induction motor load types where a voltage dip can cause an increase of the consumed current Element 27P phase undervoltage can be used to issue a trip or an alarm Transfer Schemes in the event of an undervoltage condition we can use the 27P element phase undervoltage to send a signal that will transf...

Страница 218: ...e to ground or phase to phase for wye VT connection or phase to phase for Delta VT connection or as a Definite time element The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage The delay setting selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is blocked a setting of 0 wil...

Страница 219: ...ng allows inhibiting the undervoltage element if the breaker is open breaker In case this setting is enabled the undervoltage element will be supervised by the breaker status Otherwise the element will operate independently of the breaker status Snapshot Events The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element 5 4 8 2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE ELEMENT 59P The Ph...

Страница 220: ... a ground fault or to the loss of one or two phases of the source The element responds to the system neutral voltage 3V0 calculated from the phase voltages or measured by the 4th voltage transformer VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element The element time delay is selectable between 0 and 900 seconds and incorporates a reset with a selectable delay betwe...

Страница 221: ...ION ELEMENTS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS NEUTRAL OV HIGH NEUTRAL OV HIGH 1 NEUTRAL OV HIGH 2 NEUTRAL OV HIGH 3 NEUTRAL OV LOW NEUTRAL OV LOW 1 NEUTRAL OV LOW 2 NEUTRAL OV LOW 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Pickup Level Pickup Level 10 1 V 3 300 Trip time Trip Delay 10 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Reset time Reset Delay 0 00 0 01 s 0 00 ...

Страница 222: ...orates two stages the first stage less critical is intended to produce an alarm the second stage is used for trip Both levels are set in primary values for instance if in general settings we set CT_RATIO to a value of 100 and the same value for PT_RATIO the base power will be 100 x 100 10000 W SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS AUXILIARY UV AUXILIARY UV 1 AUXILIARY UV 2 AUXILIARY UV 3 s...

Страница 223: ...esponding setting This element is ideal for reverse power applications F32 REV or forward power F32 FWD depending on the selected setting The relay measures the three phase power for wye or delta connections The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional Power Characteristic diagram The element responds to the following condition P cos ϕ ...

Страница 224: ... presented in the figures below For example for an angle of 0º the element would operate as a 32 Forward Power element while if setting an RCA angle of 180º the element would operate as a 32 Reverse Power element For angles of 90º and 270º the case would be similar but with reactive power Figures a b c d e f below shows settings for different power applications Figure 5 18 DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMEN...

Страница 225: ...fied in the setting after the breaker switches from OPEN to CLOSED Dir Power Angle 1 2 RCA This setting specifies the relay characteristic angle RCA for the directional power element This setting provides ability to respond to the function in any direction defined active forward power active low forward power etc SMIN STAGE TAP ANGLE RCA ELEMENT 0 0º Forward Active Power 0 0º Reverse Low Forward A...

Страница 226: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 5 79 5 SETTINGS 5 4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5 The following figure illustrates the conventions established Figure 5 19 ANGLES ...

Страница 227: ...This is activated when the element that corresponds to stage 1 2 is activated Events generated by this element are DIR PWR1 2 3 STG1 2 OP ON DIR PWR1 2 3 STG1 2 OP OFF DIR PWR1 2 3 STG1 2 PKP Activation of this status indicates that the power value has exceeded the threshold indicated by the Stage 1 2 element Events generated by this element are DIR PWR1 2 3 STG1 2 PKP ON DIR PWR1 2 3 STG1 2 PKP O...

Страница 228: ...l power measurement This threshold should be higher than possible unbalance during normal operation of the system Current selection The element responds to the neutral 3 times zero sequence current either calculated internally IN from the phase currents or supplied externally IG via the ground CT input This setting allows selecting the source of the operating current OC Pickup Level This setting s...

Страница 229: ...ER PICKUP DELAY setting Inverse time Inverse time characteristics delay defined by where m is a multiplier defined by the MULTIPLIER setting SPKP is the pickup setting and SOP is the operating power at the time FlexCurve A B C D any time characteristics programmed by the user with FlexCurves Multiplier Time dial multiplier Snapshot Events The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot...

Страница 230: ...iary voltage setting or supplied from the Auxiliary voltage channel VN as auxiliary voltage setting In neutral current 3 times I_0 either calculated IN as current selection setting or supplied from the ground current channel IG as current selection setting The following figure shows the logic scheme diagram for high range and low range wattmetric ground fault elements 32NH 32NL ...

Страница 231: ...5 84 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 5 4 PROTECTION ELEMENTS 5 SETTINGS 5 Figure 5 21 WATTMETRIC GROUND FAULT ELEMENTS LOGIC SCHEME ...

Страница 232: ...PKP The activation of this status indicates that the current value has exceeded the thresh old indicated and pickup delay has expired Events generated by this element are 32N1 2 3 HIGH LOW OC PKP ON 32N1 2 3 HIGH LOW OC PKP OFF 32N1 2 3 HIGH LOW PKP Activation of this status indicates that the current voltage and power value has exceeded the threshold indicated and power pickup delay has expired E...

Страница 233: ...on Switchgear up to 16 switchgear elements can be configured to operate and be monitored but only one of them can be configured as a breaker for monitoring number of openings and closings counters KI 2 t 5 5 1 SETTING GROUP The settings used for setting table management are located in Setpoint Control Elements Setting Group Table 5 73 SETTING GROUP SETTINGS The snapshot event setting enables or di...

Страница 234: ...s and for the element to operate it is necessary that the voltage value is over the value set for minimum voltage threshold This way undesired trips are prevented when the signal for metering the frequency is not available or has a very low value Table 5 74 81U ELEMENT SETTINGS The snapshot event setting enables or disables the snapshot event generation for this element Frequency elements operate ...

Страница 235: ...y is from 0 00 to 900 00 seconds Table 5 75 81O ELEMENT SETTINGS SETPOINT CONTROL ELEMENTS OVERFREQUENCY OVERFREQUENCY 1 OVERFREQUENCY 2 OVERFREQUENCY 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Pickup level Pickup Level 50 50 0 01 Hz 20 00 65 00 Trip time Trip Delay 0 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Reset time Reset Delay 0 00 0 01 s 0 00 9...

Страница 236: ...d phase angle in a given moment is the result of the existing load between remote sources connected through parallel circuits load flux as well as a consequence of the impedance of those elements connecting them even if there is no load flux in parallel circuits or because sources to be connected are completely independent and isolated from one another In interconnected systems the angle differenc...

Страница 237: ...oltage input terminals A11 A12 To enable the busbar voltage metering in the relay it is required to select VX in the Auxiliary Voltage setting at Setpoint System Setup General settings Auxiliary Voltage The voltage correspondence is detailed in the following table Table 5 76 VOLTAGE CORRESPONDENCE ELEMENT 25 Setpoint System Setup General settings Auxiliary Voltage setting must be set to Vx in orde...

Страница 238: ...nd busbar voltage to allow a closing in the synchrocheck element Angle Difference Max Angle Difference Maximum Difference in angle between the line and busbar voltage to allow a closing in the synchrocheck element Frequency Slip Max Freq Difference Maximum difference in frequency slip between both voltage values to be compared in the synchrocheck element Breaker Closing time Time Estimated breaker...

Страница 239: ...ce 1 Closing permission logic settings In case that the voltage at one or both ends of the breaker is null the synchronism element cannot establish the necessary parameters to give closing conditions and therefore it does not issue synchronism permission For those situations where the user wants to enable the closing permission in a condition of loss of one or both voltages at both ends of the bre...

Страница 240: ...n according to permission logics DL DB LL DB DL LB DL DB OPERATION Closing permission in dead line dead bus condition DL LB OPERATION Closing permission in dead line live bus condition LL DB OPERATION Closing permission in live line dead bus condition SLIP CONDITION Internal signal indicating frequency slip between the line voltage and bus voltage phasors BUS FREQ LINE FREQ Busbar Frequency higher...

Страница 241: ...ker is closed or undefined the synchronism element will not issue a closing permission signal even when closing conditions are met If voltage on one side of the breaker to be closed is null the synchronism element cannot establish the synchronism check and therefore it will not issue synchronism permission For these cases usual in breaker maintenance situations or in new installations where voltag...

Страница 242: ...tion but it will allow DL LB Operation logic if this logic is enabled by setting DL LB Function Live Line Dead Bus LL DB Case number 7 will not allow the synchronism function but it will allow LL DB operation logic if this logic is enabled by setting LL DB Function Case numbers 1 4 and 5 are not considered neither for synchronism check purposes nor for closing logic SYNCHRONISM SITUATION SYNCHRONI...

Страница 243: ...ine and busbar voltages are in phase If the slip is higher than 5 Hz as an in phase close is not possible the algorithm ensures that the difference between voltages in the real closing moment is not higher than the set value Max Volt Difference If the relative slip Δf is equal or lower than 0 005 Hz the algorithm gives permission to close as soon as the angle difference conditions are met because ...

Страница 244: ...een phasors ϕ1 Angle difference set as maximum angle difference Δϕset Max Angle Difference ϕ2 Angle difference between Vref and Vs The algorithm starts operating when ϕ2 equals two times the angle set as maximum angle difference Closing permission is given when V s is over Vref which means that line and busbar voltages are in phase If the frequency slip is high it is possible that as soon as the w...

Страница 245: ...ose goes to LOCKOUT status and the fault is considered to be permanent Dead Time 1 4 These times correspond to the first second third and fourth breaker reclosings configured in the element Reclaim Time also known as safety time or reset lockout delay This is the time required to go from LOCKOUT to READY status once the breaker is closed Cond Permission This setting enables the verification of the...

Страница 246: ... This signal is configured to block the autoreclose by pulse a pulse moves the autoreclose to BLOCK status The autoreclose block is active until an unblock signal is received AR PULSE UNBLOCK This signal is configured as autoreclose unblock by pulse this pulse is required to bring the recloser out of the block status The autoreclose goes to Lockout after a block situation AR INITIATE This signal i...

Страница 247: ...e conditions AR LCK BY TRIPS Autoreclose in Lockout by maximum number of trips Lockout status not available AR LCK BY SHOTS Autoreclose in Lockout at the end of cycle Definite trip due to Maximum Number of shots reached AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the first shot AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT Block signal sent by the autoreclose after the second shot AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT Blo...

Страница 248: ... Description of the general autoreclose status OUT OF SERVICE AR DISABLE In this status the autoreclose is disabled From any state if the Function setting is set as DISABLED the autoreclose will move to OUT OF SERVICE status where it is not operative AR READY This is the initiation and normality situation status closed breaker There are neither faults producing a autoreclose initiation nor Block s...

Страница 249: ...cle counter is increased In this time the period set in Reset Time starts to count If during the set element reset time there is no autoreclose initiation the cycle counter will reset to its initial value 1 and the autoreclose will return to the standby status READY If during the Reset Time setting period there is a new autoreclose initiation the Reclose In Progress sequence will start again If th...

Страница 250: ...e logic configuration for the block signal during the reclosing cycle Figure 5 27 BLOCK SIGNAL DURING THE RECLOSING CYCLE Figure 5 28 shows an example of the autoreclose initiation and protection element block signals after the different trips The autoreclose initiate signal is configured to the relay general trip that corresponds to virtual output 83 configured in the logic configuration tool and...

Страница 251: ...er failure element Function permission Function This setting allows enabling and disabling the 50BF element Supervision or retrip pickup level Supervision Pickup Supervision level pickup current threshold Hiset pickup level Hiset Pickup High level pickup current threshold Lowset pickup level Loset Pickup Low level pickup current threshold Internal arc pickup level Internal Arc Pickup Internal arc ...

Страница 252: ... settings Relay Configuration Protection Elements BKR FAIL NO CURRENT Signal for breaker failure without current BKR FAIL SUPERVISION Signal for supervision level breaker failure retrip BKR FAIL HISET Signal for high level breaker failure BKR FAIL LOWSET Signal for low level breaker failure INTERNAL ARC Signal for internal arc BKR FAIL 2nd STEP Signal for Second level breaker failure high and low ...

Страница 253: ...ing High and low levels constitute a second step level for the pickup of this second level only the pickup of any of the two levels hiset and loset is required For the element pickup to dropout it is required that the current is under the pickup levels of both hiset and loset settings Once the second level time delay has expired a Second Step trip signal will be issued 50BF element incorporates al...

Страница 254: ... very low positive sequence voltage but any negative sequence voltage F650 elements detect fuse failure under three possible situations 1 Breaker closed and positive sequence voltage V1 under an established value V1 0 5 p u 2 Positive sequence voltage lower than 0 5 p u V1 0 5 p u and positive sequence current higher than 0 075 p u I1 0 075 p u 3 Ratio between the negative and positive voltage com...

Страница 255: ...d during a period longer than the set time delay the element will trip In order to avoid trips or pickups with very weak loads there is a current level threshold to inhibit the operation of the element when the three phase currents are below a fixed level Note The I2 I1 current inhibition level for the different firmware versions is as follows SETPOINT CONTROL ELEMENTS BROKEN CONDUCTOR SETTING DES...

Страница 256: ...iate these situations from broken conductor situations 5 5 9 LOCKED ROTOR F650 incorporates a locked rotor element with three elements Protection element 48 produces a trip when current primary values exceeds the set value This current setting value is the product of the set Full load current by the pickup setting Setpoint Control Elements Locked Rotor Table 5 87 LOCKED ROTOR ELEMENT SETTINGS Lock...

Страница 257: ...ake into account that the input output settings are both set for the generic input as well as for the pulse counter input e g Debounce time The settings for this function can be found at Setpoint Control Elements Pulse Counters Table 5 90 PULSE COUNTERS SETTINGS Pulse Counters settings are CntPulses Enabled Enable disable each pulse counter CntPulses Name Each pulse counter can have a configurable...

Страница 258: ... Factor set for that pulse For each pulse counter there are two magnitudes available the actual value and the frozen value The freeze and unfreeze and reset operations are similar to the energy management the signals used for that purpose are the same for both energy and pulse counters By default all the values are unfreeze updating the values in a continuous mode After a freeze operation the free...

Страница 259: ... the Analog Level signal to 1 Analog Hysteresis It establishes the deadband at each extreme when going out of operation band Direction IN min value min hysteresis in max value max hysteresis in Direction OUT min value min hysteresis in max value max hysteresis in Analog Direction Analog direction for the activation signal to be set Inside or Outside the Deadband OUT The Analog Level X will give an...

Страница 260: ...Table 5 94 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE SETTINGS ANALOG COMPARATORS STATUS Analog Level 01 Analog Level 02 Analog Level 03 Analog Level 04 Analog Level 05 Analog Level 06 Analog Level 07 Analog Level 08 Analog Level 09 Analog Level 10 Analog Level 11 Analog Level 12 Analog Level 13 Analog Level 14 Analog Level 15 Analog Level 16 Analog Level 17 Analog Level 18 Analog Level 19 Analog Level 20 SETPOINT ...

Страница 261: ...see frequency reference setting in general settings Freq rate Min This setting defines the minimum frequency required in this unit to be enabled For any value under this level the element is disabled Freq rate Max This setting defines the maximum frequency allowed in this unit to be enabled For any value above this level the element is disabled Freq rate Delay Time that the element must remain pic...

Страница 262: ...oad Encroachment function Min Voltage This setting specifies the minimum positive sequence voltage required for operation of the element If the voltage is below this threshold a blocking signal will not be asserted by the element Reach This setting specifies the impedance reach of the element as shown in the load encroachment characteristic diagram This settings should be entered in secondary ohms...

Страница 263: ... 98 LOAD ENCROACHMENT STATUS The block signals for the frequency rate of change element can be viewed at Actual Status Protection Protection Blocks Table 5 99 LOAD ENCROACHMENT BLOCKS There are three load encroachment type of signals Load Encroachment Block Writing status When this signal is asserted the Load Encroachment function is blocked until this signal is eliminated and the positive sequenc...

Страница 264: ...0 COMMON 9 16 COMMON 5 8 COMMON 9 16 COMMON 9 16 11 CC9 CC5 CC9 CC9 12 CC10 CC6 CC10 CC10 13 CC11 CC7 CC11 CC11 14 CC12 CC8 CC12 CC12 15 CC13 COIL 2 CC13 CC13 4 1 C C 4 1 C C a 2 5 4 1 C C 6 1 17 CC15 COIL 2 CC15 CC15 6 1 C C 6 1 C C b 2 5 6 1 C C 8 1 4 1 D L E I H S 7 1 C C 9 1 8 1 C C 0 2 9 1 C C 1 2 0 2 C C 2 2 1 2 C C 3 2 2 2 C C 4 2 3 2 C C 5 2 4 2 C C 6 2 4 2 7 1 N O M M O C 7 2 2 3 5 2 N O ...

Страница 265: ... Type_X NONE N A NONE 16 INP 8OUT 8 INP 8OUT SUPV 32 INP 16 INP 8 ANA Input activation voltage threshold Group A Voltage Threshold A_X 80 1 V 10 230 Input activation voltage threshold Group B Voltage Threshold B_X 80 1 V 10 230 Input activation voltage threshold Group C Voltage Threshold C_X 80 1 V 10 230 Input activation voltage threshold Group D Voltage Threshold D_X 80 1 V 10 230 Debounce time ...

Страница 266: ...rd type are as follows Table 5 101 I O BOARD TYPE CCY Is the name used for inputs in I O boards 0Z Is the name used for the different outputs in I O boards ASSOCIATED DIGIT ENERVISTA 650 SETUP BOARD SETTINGS BOARD TYPE 0 NONE None 1 16 INP 8OUT Mixed 2 8 INP 8 OUT SUPV Supervision 4 32 INP 32 digital inputs 5 16 INP 8 ANA 8 Analog Inputs 16 digital inputs ...

Страница 267: ...ve Positive and Negative settings correspond to signals that are activated or deactivated with the input level considering the delay setting Positive edge and Negative edge settings correspond to signals that are activated with the change of the input signal in this case the Delay Input Time will not be considered only the Debounce Time this edge signals are deactivated automatically after one PLC...

Страница 268: ...ED AND ANALOG BOARD TYPES 1 AND 5 SUPERVISION BOARD TYPE 2 32 DI TYPE 4 CONT IP_X_CC1 CC1 CC1 CC1 CC17 CONT IP_X_CC2 CC2 CC2 CC2 CC18 CONT IP_X_CC3 CC3 CC3 CC3 CC19 CONT IP_X_CC4 CC4 CC4 CC4 CC20 CONT IP_X_CC5 CC5 CC5 CC5 CC21 CONT IP_X_CC6 CC6 CC6 CC6 CC22 CONT IP_X_CC7 CC7 CC7 CC7 CC23 CONT IP_X_CC8 CC8 CC8 CC8 CC24 CONT IP_X_CC9 CC9 Va_COIL1 CC9 CC25 CONT IP_X_CC10 CC10 Vb_COIL1 CC10 CC26 CONT ...

Страница 269: ...the default value is Normal Normal The contact output follows the activation command Remains active while the operation signal is active Pulse The contact output is active the pulse output time according to the Pulse Output Time setting Latched The output remains active after the operation signal has been cleared The reset signal for the latched outputs is configured at Setpoint Relay Configuratio...

Страница 270: ...ntact output reset signal is set at Setpoint Relay Configuration Outputs Contact Output Reset Actual Inputs Outputs I O Board Status These signals are associated to the different I O boards There are internal signals that provide information about the status of these boards indicating whether there is any anomaly in the board or whether the board is not available in the relay according to the rela...

Страница 271: ...s reset the relay contact will open before the breaker auxiliary 52 a even if the time delay of the first has expired By using this function we prevent the relay contact from cutting the current basically inductive and high from the tripping circuit which could cause damage to the element as these currents exceed the nominal breaking characteristics The circuit and the current threshold of the fun...

Страница 272: ...bsections describe the different types of connection to create each supervision scheme in an easy way As the supervision circuits are identical only the first group connection examples will be described being also applicable to the second group In order to assure a high isolation level between groups the digital inputs for supervision have been located in a symmetrical basis That is to optimize th...

Страница 273: ...S OUTPUTS 5 SETTINGS 5 b WITHOUT SUPERVISION This is a very frequent common case and we must only wire the tripping circuit to terminals F35 and F36 leaving unused terminals F34 F15 F16 F17 F18 Figure 5 36 CIRCUIT WITHOUT TRIPPING CIRCUIT SUPERVISION A6631F1 ...

Страница 274: ... be used to produce a latching of the output relay so that it will remain closed while the circulating current is over 200 mA To use the seal in feature in the relay it is not necessary to configure any setting It works we only must program the corresponding Circuit latching setting wiring the external circuit to terminals F34 and F36 With this scheme in the case of a failure to open from the brea...

Страница 275: ...UXILIARY CONTACT 52A AND A RESISTOR A6631F3 Table 5 105 SUPERVISION WITH 52 A There is a possibility to monitor the trip circuit and trip coil continuity This can be done by monitoring Vdc through the output contact when this is open INTERNAL STATE V 52 A SUPERVISION 52 open ON OK 52 closed ON OK TRIP OFF OK if t 0 5 s TRIP with 52 open OFF OK if t 0 5 s ...

Страница 276: ...stance will be selected so that the V 52 a input circuit minimum detection current flows but not as high as to activate the breaker tripping coil The figure shows the following equation Where Vmin Is the minimum voltage in Volts expected in the battery e g 80 of Vn R Resistance in kilo ohms 2 2 mA of approximate current flowing through input V 52 a As shown in the second case in the table with an ...

Страница 277: ...ill not be used but it must be observed in the element logic that the corresponding signal CONT IP_F_CC16 SUP_COIL2 will be activated showing a failure when the breaker is open Therefore it will be required to supervise the continuity failure signaling by the breaker status information Figure 5 39 TRIP CIRCUIT AND TRIP COIL SUPERVISION USING AUXILIARY CONTACT 52 A ONLY WITH CLOSED BREAKER A6631F5 ...

Страница 278: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 5 131 5 SETTINGS 5 6 INPUTS OUTPUTS 5 e WITH DOUBLE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION Figure 5 40 SUPERVISION APPLICATION WITH AUXILIARY CONTACTS 52A AND 52B A6631F4 ...

Страница 279: ...me the tripping contact shown in the example as the F650 trip relay can be the one in the relay terminals F35 and F36 or be provided by another protection or by the parallel of several protections This provides high flexibility in the use of this circuit The battery voltage can also be monitored by using one of the standard digital inputs STATUS OF INVOLVED ELEMENTS INPUTS TO 650 DECISION CIRCUIT ...

Страница 280: ...h the 52a voltage monitor to prevent CB tripping with a short circuited voltage monitor With CB open 52 a is open and 52 b is closed A shorted 52 a voltage monitor will not cause a trip because 52 b voltage monitor is current limited to 2mA With a shorted 52 b voltage monitor no false trip will be performed because 52 a is in series limiting current to 2mA Figure 5 41 SUPERVISION APPLICATION WITH ...

Страница 281: ...Their status can be established as ON 1 and OFF 0 through writing by communications using EnerVista 650 Setup The change of state of virtual inputs is made according to their type Latched virtual inputs remain at the set value until it is changed by communications Self reset virtual inputs are activated by writing and they remain active during one cycle There are 32 virtual inputs of each type 5 6...

Страница 282: ...d to each virtual output Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the logic equations For more detailed information see chapters 5 9 and 5 10 in this manual 5 6 9 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS LATCHED There are 16 virtual outputs latched that may be assigned via Logic configuration If not assigned the output will be forced to OFF Logic 0 Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass throu...

Страница 283: ...mms GSSE N A NONE GSSE GOOSE Device Identification 650 ID F650 N A Hold time signal send by the transmitting device Hold Time 10000 1 ms 1000 60000 Snapshot Events Generation Snapshot Events Remote Out DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Remote Device Description Remote Device X Remote Device X N A Bit Pair Selection Bit Pair X None N A DNA 1 to DNA 32 UserSt 1 to UserSt 64 Default Value Selection Defau...

Страница 284: ... models Setpoint Inputs Outputs Force Outputs This menu allows activating each contact output in the relay to facilitate maintenance testing In the screen the user can select the I O board to be tested and also select which output is to be forced operated After selecting the desired output clicking on the checkbox on the left the user must press on the Force Output button to activate the selected ...

Страница 285: ...can be performed on this screen using the or and not columns for more complex logics go to the logic configuration tool to create the virtual outputs and afterwards select it in the source column The different options available in this screen are the following Select checkbox enables each output The output must be enabled before modifying any other setting on that output Name setting for defining ...

Страница 286: ... defines which function logic remote input digital input etc will activate the LED OR checkbox for configuring the LED operation by activation of any of the indicated signals The element performs an OR of the signals and its output produces operation NOT checkbox for inverting or not the configured logic From the LED configuration screen it is possible to print the vertical LED label for the relay...

Страница 287: ... selection for the interlock input Source Selects a function digital input logic etc for defining each input of each AND gate NOT Logic inverter Figure 5 46 OPERATIONS AND INTERLOCKS Final State Type setting defines whether the operation requires in addition to the interlock logic any other conditions to determine a success condition If so we must select LOGIC Otherwise we must select NONE Final S...

Страница 288: ...gh the ETHERNET It must be taken into account that besides the master selection in the operations screen inside relay configuration there is a hardware selection with the operation pushbutton in the front part of the relay to switch between local COM2 and HMI and remote masters COM1 and ETHERNET for operations The local remote off sequence can be also available through communications selecting the...

Страница 289: ...at conform the Interlock that enables the operation have been selected To save the interlock press on the disk icon on the toolbar A Logic Saved message will be displayed Once the Interlocks have been defined the user must define the success conditions for the operation define Final State Type as LOGIC and a PRESS FOR LOGIC message will light up below Final States When clicking on PRESS FOR LOGIC ...

Страница 290: ...ctivated when the related operation is executed Figure 5 48 CONTACT OUTPUT CONFIGURATION Note Operations time out for confirmation Configurable screen in graphical HMI In the relay HMI the configurable objects wait one minute for confirmation after operation selection The object will be blinking during one minute After that time the object will be deselected Front Keys In operations performed by f...

Страница 291: ...ogic signal to perform the LED reset by communications The settings are as follows Select checkbox enables disables the selection Source setting defines the operand that performs the function indicated in the SELECT column NOT setting inverts the block signal NOT setting for inverting the logic signal OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one The relay performs an OR of the...

Страница 292: ...he digital channel to be included in oscillography records Source setting defines the source or signal to be recorded in that specific channel which can be selected among all the operands available in the signals menu NOT checkbox inverts the enabled digital channel signal OR checkbox to select a group of operands instead of a single one The relay performs an OR of the signals and its output produ...

Страница 293: ...his screen An OR of several operands selecting directly the OR column in this same menu A logic combination of operands by selecting a VIRTUAL OUTPUT as trigger source and using the logic configuration available in the relay graphical PLC that allows to design logic circuits and to assign their outputs to internal variables called VIRTUAL OUTPUT Available settings are as follows Select checkbox en...

Страница 294: ...ree different masters local remote COM1 remote Ethernet The alarms can be active or not active and can be acknowledged or not acknowledged As shown in the following table Table 5 110 ALARM MANAGEMENT ACTIVE status is shown on the display relay HMI showing an ON label on the right of the alarm The PC will show the alarm text in red color ACKNOWLEDGED Operation acknowledgement can be performed from ...

Страница 295: ...switch This column and the next two columns are only active if the selected contact type in the Contacts column is 52b or 52a 52b OR checkbox selects a group of operands instead of a single one The relay performs OR of the signals and its output produces operation NOT checkbox inverts the status of the signal selected in column Contact B Open text setting allows associating a text to the control e...

Страница 296: ...FIGURATION Note when a switchgear device is only monitored open init and closing init signals are not used it is not possible to distinguish between the fail to open or fail to close time the time used to give an error 00 or 11 signal is the maximum of the opening and closing time configured for that switchgear ...

Страница 297: ... be used to configured switchgear elements operations metering values date and time etc The configured values will always be updated with the real status of the relay This functionality is only applicable to F650 elements with graphical display and not for elements with alphanumerical display Depending on the relay model the graphical display can show IEC 1082 1 symbols N selection in ordering cod...

Страница 298: ...en the device it is inserted the device can be seen and when it is not inserted only a blank space will be displayed These symbols correspond to contactors in vertical and horizontal positions These symbols correspond to selector switches in vertical and horizontal positions OTHER CONFIGURABLE SYMBOLS Available for both M N C and D selection MULTISTATE VARIABLE SYMBOL Displays on screen a dialog b...

Страница 299: ... tab order Once selected a blue border square will be shown Place this square on the object to be operated When the object is selected on the screen to execute this operations the object on which it is located will blink then press key I or O to execute the operations configured This symbol indicates the possibility to configure and execute operations with the frontal keys I O and on the graphic d...

Страница 300: ... M Two and three winding voltage transformers representation Only for N model IEC selection Current transformer representation Only for N model IEC selection Symbols reserved for future uses Both M and N selection Symbol for capacitor banks Both M and N selection Symbol for vertical capacitor banks Only for N model IEC selection Symbol for wye connection Both M and N selection Symbol for open delt...

Страница 301: ...een improved with the following data Offline mode select type of graphical display Extended graphic symbols 5 9 9 2 TYPE OF GRAPHICAL DISPLAY You can select from two types of graphical displays depending on the ordering code Figure 5 54 5 9 9 3 EXTENDED GRAPHIC SYMBOLS New symbols have been added to HMI Extraction device must be set to 52a 52b switchgear device ...

Страница 302: ...ctions The logical configuration is performed using graphical functions based on the IEC 61131 3 standard This standard defines five basic ways of programming Sequential Function Chart SFC Instruction List IL Structured Text ST Ladder Diagram LD Function Block Diagram FBD Out of these five methods FBD has been chosen because it allows for graphical configurations that are more comprehensive This m...

Страница 303: ... of the digital input to the logic All available internal status can be used as logic inputs OUTPUT FROM LOGIC Virtual output built with internal logic Up to 512 LIBRARY Possibility to build blocks of logic in a simple graphic object OR and AND from 3 to 8 inputs are provided as libraries AND of two digital inputs OR of two digital inputs NOT of a digital input NAND of two digital inputs XOR of tw...

Страница 304: ...ET When the input signal is set to 1 the output signal remain fixed to 1 till a reset signal is received RESET When the input signal is reset to 1 the output signal remain fixed to 0 ONS The input signal is pulsed The width of the output pulse will be the same as that of the PLC cycle TIMER With selectable time MASK one SET input and one RESET input 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 ut 0 1 0 1 ut 0 1 SET input 0 1 RE...

Страница 305: ...uations that will form the logical configuration of the element The next diagram shows the way compiled logic equations are built Figure 5 55 COMPILED LOGIC EQUATIONS A single equation is composed of one or more inputs one or more operations and one output The order of equations is determined by the relative position of their outputs In the following example is shown the order of compilation for e...

Страница 306: ... the document before printing Exit The system closes all open projects and exits the application 5 10 3 2 PROJECT MENU The Project menu includes the following options Project Explorer Displays a window where we see a tree structure with the files contained in the project Insert library Inserts a library in the active automatic function 5 10 3 3 EDIT MENU The Edit menu includes the following option...

Страница 307: ...he toolbar at the top of the screen A logic input can be any of the available digital internal status provided by the relay Such as protection status contact inputs contact outputs I O status other protection status front keys LEDs operation bits virtual inputs and virtual outputs 5 10 4 4 ADD AN OUTPUT TO AN AUTOMATISM Using the mouse click on the button that represents the outputs in the toolbar...

Страница 308: ...tputs of the library and to the library itself will be ones used to represent the library as an object in the main project Internal variables inside the libraries will be assigned randomly when compiling These libraries are saved in the LIB folder in order to be used in further projects 5 10 5 1 LIBRARY EXAMPLE Go to the main menu File Library Open Library New Library Open a new library or modify ...

Страница 309: ...AMPLE Go to the main menu and select File New project create a new project and select an input in the icons toolbar on the top of the window This input will be selected as a digital input among the several options for inputs that can be selected This input is the SET input for the first timer to launch the output activation signal Click on the icon related to the timer to insert the timer on the p...

Страница 310: ... timer 1 timer 2 has been created the activation signal VO_100_OUTPUT_ACTIVATION is linked to several virtual outputs Therefore virtual outputs VO_102_OUTPUT_1 VO_103_OUTPUT_2 VO_104_OUTPUT_3 VO_105_OUTPUT_4 will be activated if the CONT IP_G_CC1 CC1 variable is set to 1 Once the VO_100_OUTPUT_ACTIVATION is active it will be deactivated after 200 ms and will remain deactivated for 5 seconds This p...

Страница 311: ... 44 or lower For firmware versions 3 60 or higher ones please go to section 7 3 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR This menu is located in Setpoint 61850 Configuration The user can configure some 61850 parameter in the F650 icd file and then send this file to the relay The parameters that are possible to configure are Domain name parameters IED Name LD Name from the Domain Name Ethernet parameters IP Address ...

Страница 312: ...sociated db data items in the CF functional constraint of the MMXU logical node as per the IEC 61850 standard According to IEC 61850 7 3 the db values will represent the percentage of difference between the maximum and the minimum in units of 0 00 Thus it is important to know the maximum value for each MMXU measured quantity since this represents the 100 00 value for the deadband The minimum value...

Страница 313: ...5 166 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 5 11 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION 5 SETTINGS 5 Figure 5 62 MMXU DEADBAND SETTINGS CONFIGURATION ...

Страница 314: ... from the relay and start working with it The user can save the changes to the f650procome cfg configuration file and send it to the relay Send Configuration In order to start working with the new procome configuration the relay must be switched off and on The procome slave can be identified besides the slave number with a long name 8 characters identifier and with a sort name 4 characters identif...

Страница 315: ...h the mouse and then press on the remove button and the signal will be removed from the status list To save the data in the configuration file press the save button and all the data will be stored in the f650procome cfg file Analog Measurements In the measurements configuration screen for each measurement selected the configuration signals are Procome ID which is the identification number for each...

Страница 316: ...en allow the user to configure the procome number that identifies the command in the procome protocol and the operation bit number that the slave when the command has DCO_ON and the operation to be executed when the command is DCO_OFF The user can set the same operation for DCO_ON and DCO_OFF or a different one for each status if desired The user must select Procome ID IEC which is the identificat...

Страница 317: ...ons must be set in the Setpoint Relay configuration Operations and Setpoint Relay configuration Protection Elements in FREEZE ENERGY CNT UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT and RESET ENERGY CNT For example if the ENERGY RESET operation is the 6th one in the operations screen it must be configured to the ENERGY RESET CNT input in the protection elements screen To configure this operation to be launched through pro...

Страница 318: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 5 171 5 SETTINGS 5 12 PROCOME CONFIGURATION 5 Figure 5 67 COUNTERS OPERATIONS CONFIGURATION ...

Страница 319: ...l the mapped information will be send as a respond to a general interrogation In the interoperability table the states that the standard propose have been selected with the suitable information number Some of them must be generated in the firmware code as an OR operation This information is mapped by default but the user can delete them if desired For the other states the customer can assign the I...

Страница 320: ... nine measurands could be sent in the IEC103 slave answer For each measurand all metering values that F650 supports will be available in order to be mapped In the measurands configuration screen with each selected measurement a Factor and an Offset must be configured The Factor is a multiplier factor and the Offset is an offset factor to be applied to the relay measurement to make the final measur...

Страница 321: ...f reset will be available in order to be mapped using the EnerVista 650 Setup program It would be possible to choose the desired command for the ON state and the same or different command for the OFF state The customer will be able to select the Information Number 1 255 and the Function Type 0 255 but the Identification Type 20 General Commands is fixed and it will be used to send a command to the...

Страница 322: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 5 175 5 SETTINGS 5 13 IEC 60870 5 103 PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION 5 Figure 5 70 COMMANDS CONFIGURATION FOR IEC 60870 5 103 PROTOCOL ...

Страница 323: ...5 176 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 5 13 IEC 60870 5 103 PROTOCOL CONFIGURATION 5 SETTINGS 5 ...

Страница 324: ...he following figure Actual Front Panel LEDs by the lighting of the associated LED in the appropriate color The Ready LED is green when the relay is in service LEDs 1 to 5 light up in red when active LEDs 6 to 10 light up in orange and the last 5 LEDs light up in green The first five LEDs are latched by hardware and can only be reset by a LEDs RESET Command either pressing the esc key on the Front ...

Страница 325: ...d at Actual Status Breaker Table 6 3 BREAKER STATUS BREAKER OPEN Open breaker status In the switchgear selected as breaker besides providing the usual switchgear contact status the system provides also the open breaker closed breaker and undefined breaker states BREAKER CLOSED Breaker closed BREAKER UNDEFINED If there are two digital inputs configured for breaker contacts 52 a and 52 b this status...

Страница 326: ...2 BLK INP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH BLK NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK NEUTRAL TOC3 BLOCK GROUND DIR3 BLK INP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH BLK GROUND IOC1 BLOCK GROUND TOC1 BLOCK SENS GND DIR1 BLK IP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW BLK GROUND IOC2 BLOCK GROUND TOC2 BLOCK SENS GND DIR2 BLK IP NEUTRAL OV2 LOW BLK GROUND IOC3 BLOCK GROUND TOC3 BLOCK SENS GND DIR3 BLK IP NEUTRAL OV3 LOW BLK SENS GND IOC1 BLK SENS GND TOC1 BLOCK POWER BLOCKS AUXILIAR...

Страница 327: ... HIGH PKP PH TOC1 HIGH PKP PHASE DIR1 BLOCK B PH IOC1 HIGH OP PH TOC1 HIGH OP PHASE DIR1 B OP PH IOC2 HIGH A B C PKP PH TOC2 HIGH A B C PKP PHASE DIR1 BLOCK C PH IOC2 HIGH A B C OP PH TOC2 HIGH A B C OP PHASE DIR1 C OP PH IOC2 HIGH PKP PH TOC2 HIGH PKP PHASE DIR2 BLOCK A PH IOC2 HIGH OP PH TOC2 HIGH OP PHASE DIR2 A OP PH IOC3 HIGH A B C PKP PH TOC3 HIGH A B C PKP PHASE DIR2 BLOCK B PH IOC3 HIGH A ...

Страница 328: ...round element will light up the corresponding LED in this screen and it will remain lit as the associated function remains in pickup or operation This screen is accessed in menu Actual Status Protection Ground Current and includes the following signaling LEDs Table 6 7 GROUND CURRENT ACTUAL VALUES NEUTRAL IOC ACTUAL VALUES NEUTRAL TOC ACTUAL VALUES NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL ACTUAL VALUES NEUTRAL IOC1 PK...

Страница 329: ...essed in menu Actual Status Protection Sensitive Ground Current and includes the following signaling LEDs Table 6 8 SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT ACTUAL VALUES SENSITIVE GROUND IOC ACTUAL VALUES SENSITIVE GROUND TOC ACTUAL VALUES ISOLATED GROUND ACTUAL VALUES SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL ACTUAL VALUES SENS GND IOC1 PKP SENS GND TOC1 PKP ISOLATED GND1 PKP SENS GND DIR1 BLOCK SENS GND IOC1 OP SENS GND TO...

Страница 330: ...e thermal image value for all the phases and functions in percentage All the values are provided individually for phases and for the three thermal elements This screen is accessed in menu Actual Status Protection Thermal image and includes the following signaling LEDs Table 6 10 THERMAL MODEL ACTUAL VALUES NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TOC ACTUAL VALUES NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP NEG SEQ TOC1 OP NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP NEG SE...

Страница 331: ...BC PKP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH PKP PHASE UV1 B OP PHASE UV2 CA PKP PHASE OV1 BC OP NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP PHASE UV1 C PKP PHASE UV2 CA OP PHASE OV1 CA PKP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH PKP PHASE UV1 C OP PHASE UV2 PKP PHASE OV1 CA OP NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP PHASE UV1 AB PKP PHASE UV2 OP PHASE OV1 PKP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW PKP PHASE UV1 AB OP PHASE UV3 A PKP PHASE OV1 OP NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP PHASE UV1 BC PKP PHASE UV3 A OP PHASE OV2...

Страница 332: ...OUND FAULT ACTUAL VALUES FWD PWR1 STG1 PKP DIR PWR1 STG1 PKP 32N1 HIGH PKP FWD PWR1 STG1 OP DIR PWR1 STG1 OP 32N1 HIGH OC PKP FWD PWR1 STG2 PKP DIR PWR1 STG2 PKP 32N1 HIGH OP FWD PWR1 STG2 OP DIR PWR1 STG2 OP 32N2 HIGH PKP FWD PWR2 STG1 PKP DIR PWR1 STG PKP 32N2 HIGH OC PKP FWD PWR2 STG1 OP DIR PWR1 STG OP 32N2 HIGH OP FWD PWR2 STG2 PKP DIR PWR2 STG1 PKP 32N3 HIGH PKP FWD PWR2 STG2 OP DIR PWR2 STG...

Страница 333: ...2 SYNCHROCHECK This screen can be accessed at Actual Status Control Elements Synchrocheck and it includes the following signaling LEDs for the synchronism check function Table 6 14 SYNCHROCHECK ACTUAL VALUES Synchrocheck BLK INP Block signal for the synchrocheck unit configurable at Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection Elements Synchrocheck OP Closing permission signal in live line live bus con...

Страница 334: ...ck COND OP Closing permission according to permission logics DL DB LL DB DL LB DL DB OPERATION Closing permission in dead line dead bus condition DL LB OPERATION Closing permission in dead line live bus condition LL DB OPERATION Closing permission in live line dead bus condition SLIP CONDITION Internal signal indicating frequency slip between the line voltage and bus voltage phasors BUS FREQ LINE ...

Страница 335: ...it by pulse AR PULSE UNBLOCK programmable signal to unblock the autoreclose unit by pulse AR INITIATE programmable signal to initiate the autoreclose AR CONDS INPUT programmable signal to set the conditions to be met before executing a breaker close AUTORECLOSE INPUTS AR LEVEL BLOCK AR PULSE BLOCK AR PULSE UNBLOCK AR INITIATE AR CONDS INPUT AUTORECLOSE INTERNAL STATUS AR CLOSE BREAKER AR OUT OF SE...

Страница 336: ...ailure in closing the breaker AR LCK BY USER Autoreclose in Lockout by manual close AR LCK BY CONDS Autoreclose in Lockout by conditions See input conditions configuration AR LCK BY TRIPS Autoreclose in Lockout by maximum number of trips AR LCK BY SHOTS Autoreclose in Lockout at the end of cycle Definite trip AR BLK AFTER 1 SHOT Signal sent by the autoreclose after the 1st shot AR BLK AFTER 2 SHOT...

Страница 337: ...ALUES 6 2 4 6 BROKEN CONDUCTOR F650 units incorporate three Broken Conductor elements for special applications that may require different timing steps or levels for alarm or trip purposes The green LED will light up when the pickup or trip operation of each of the three available functions is activated The three of them are identical and can be configured separately These functions compare the neg...

Страница 338: ...650 units incorporate eight pulse counters For each of them there are two magnitudes the actual value and the freeze value This screen shows the activation of all pulse counters available in the F650 It can be accessed from the menu Actual Status Control Elements Pulse counters and it includes the following values Table 6 21 PULSE COUNTERS ACTUAL VALUES SETTING GROUPS ACTUAL VALUES GROUP 1 ACT ON ...

Страница 339: ...s screen shows the activation of all load encroachment elements available in the F650 It can be accessed from the menu Actual Status Control Elements Load Encroachment and it includes the following signalling LEDs Table 6 23 LOAD ENCROACHMENT ACTUAL VALUES ANALOG COMPARATORS ACTUAL VALUES Analog Level 01 Analog Level 02 Analog Level 03 Analog Level 04 Analog Level 05 Analog Level 06 Analog Level 0...

Страница 340: ...2 Neutral IOC3 Ground IOC1 Ground IOC2 Ground IOC3 Sensitive Ground IOC1 Sensitive Ground IOC2 Sensitive Ground IOC3 Phase TOC1 High Phase TOC2 High Phase TOC3 High Neutral TOC1 Neutral TOC2 Neutral TOC3 Ground TOC1 Ground TOC2 Ground TOC3 Sensitive Ground TOC1 Sensitive Ground TOC2 Sensitive Ground TOC3 Phase UV1 Phase UV2 Phase UV3 Negative Sequence OV1 Negative Sequence OV2 Negative Sequence OV...

Страница 341: ...ce TOC1 Negative Sequence TOC2 Negative Sequence TOC3 Overfrequency1 Overfrequency2 Overfrequency3 Underfrequency1 Underfrequency2 Underfrequency3 Oscillography Fault Report Broken Conductor1 Broken Conductor2 Broken Conductor3 Isolated Ground IOC1 Isolated Ground IOC2 Isolated Ground IOC3 Sensitive Ground Directional1 Sensitive Ground Directional2 Sensitive Ground Directional3 Forward power1 Forw...

Страница 342: ...CTION SUMMARY CONT Locked Rotor1 Locked Rotor2 Locked Rotor3 Frequency rate1 Frequency rate2 Frequency rate3 Load Encroachment1 Load Encroachment2 Load Encroachment3 Watt Gnd Flt High 1 Watt Gnd Flt High 2 Watt Gnd Flt High 3 Watt Gnd Flt Low 1 Watt Gnd Flt Low 2 Watt Gnd Flt Low 3 ...

Страница 343: ... High Event Phase IOC2 High Event Phase IOC3 High Event Phase IOC1 Low Event Phase IOC2 Low Event Phase IOC3 Low Event Neutral IOC1 Event Neutral IOC2 Event Neutral IOC3 Event Ground IOC1 Event Ground IOC2 Event Ground IOC3 Event Sensitive Ground IOC1 Event Sensitive Ground IOC2 Event Sensitive Ground IOC3 Event Phase TOC1 High Event Phase TOC2 High Event Phase TOC3 High Event Neutral TOC1 Event N...

Страница 344: ...ar7 Event Switchgear8 Event Switchgear9 Event Switchgear10 Event Switchgear11 Event Switchgear12 Event Switchgear13 Event Switchgear14 Event Switchgear15 Event Switchgear16 Event Breaker Settings Event Directional Power1 Event Directional Power2 Event Directional Power3 Event Analog Comparators Event Locked Rotor1 Event Locked Rotor2 Event Locked Rotor3 Event Remote Outputs Event Remote Inputs Eve...

Страница 345: ...ITCH X B INPUT The LED will light up when the input associated to that switchgear Contact B is activated SWITCH X A STATUS Status associated to Switchgear contact A It is activated once the time required for the Switchgear module to acknowledge contact A has expired SWITCH X B STATUS Status associated to Switchgear contact B It is activated once the time required for the Switchgear module to ackno...

Страница 346: ... close from the associated external device closing time exceeded See attached figure Figure 6 1 SWITCHGEAR CONTACTS 6 2 9 CALIBRATION This screen can be accessed at Actual Status Calibration and it includes the internal calibration status for the relay Table 6 28 CALIBRATION STATUS FACTORY CALIBRATION This value will be active when the relay calibration settings are the default values no calibrati...

Страница 347: ...tus Records Status Fault Reports Table 6 30 FAULT REPORT STATUS FAULT REPORT TRIGG This signal indicates whether the signal that initiates the calculation of the distance to the fault has been activated CLEAR FAULT REPORTS This signal indicates the reset of fault reports FAULT DATE Date and time of the last fault produced in the relay In format Day Month year Hour minutes seconds milliseconds FAUL...

Страница 348: ...his screen This screen shows as well the oscillography trigger status active or inactive by lighting up that channel Table 6 32 OSCILLOGRAPHY STATUS The last three values shown are as follows NUMBER OF TRIGGERS This is the number of the last oscillography record obtained in the relay This value has a range of 0 to 999 CYCLES PER RECORD This is the number of cycles contained in the oscillography re...

Страница 349: ...g demand DEMAND RESET INP Signal to reset the demand These signals can be configured at Setpoint Relay Configuration Protection Elements 6 2 12 6 ENERGY Freeze Unfreeze reset Energy These signals correspond to the relay energy counters statuses of freeze unfreeze and reset Actual Status Records Status Energy Table 6 35 ENERGY STATUS FREEZE ENERGY CNT Signal used to freeze the energy counters for m...

Страница 350: ...openings BKR OPEN 1 HOUR ALARM Alarm related to the maximum number of breaker openings in one hour BREAKER OPENINGS Counter of the total number of openings performed by the breaker BREAKER CLOSINGS Counter of the total number of closings performed by the breaker KI2t PHASE A kI2 t phase A counter total accumulative breaking level phase A KI2t PHASE B kI2t phase B counter total accumulative breakin...

Страница 351: ...IMARY VALUES DESCRIPTION UNITS CT Ratio N A CT Ratio Ig N A CT Ratio Isg N A Ia Angle Deg Ib Angle Deg Ic Angle Deg In Angle Deg Ig Angle Deg Isg Angle Deg Phasor Ia Primary KA Phasor Ib Primary KA Phasor Ic Primary KA Phasor Ig Primary KA Phasor Isg Primary KA Phasor In Primary KA RMS Ia Primary KA RMS Ib Primary KA RMS Ic Primary KA RMS Ig Primary KA RMS Isg Primary KA I0 Primary KA I1 Primary K...

Страница 352: ...ers method DESCRIPTION UNITS PT Ratio N A Va Angle Deg Vb Angle Deg Vc Angle Deg Vn Angle Deg Vx Angle Deg Vab Angle Deg Vbc Angle Deg Vca Angle Deg V0 Primary KV V1 Primary KV V2 Primary KV Vab Primary KV Vbc Primary KV Vca Primary KV Va Primary KV Vb Primary KV Vc Primary KV Vn Primary KV Vx Primary KV VBB Primary KV VL Primary KV DESCRIPTION UNITS Phase A Real Pwr MW Phase A Reactive Pwr MVAr P...

Страница 353: ... MVarhour MVArh Negative MVarhour MVArh Pos Mwatthour Cnt MWh Neg Mwatthour Cnt MWh Pos MVarhour Cnt MVArh Neg MVarhour Cnt MVArh DESCRIPTION UNITS DEMAND IA KA DEMAND IA MAX KA DEMAND IA DATE dd mm yy hh mm ss ms DEMAND IB KA DEMAND IB MAX KA DEMAND IB DATE dd mm yy hh mm ss ms DEMAND IC KA DEMAND IC MAX KA DEMAND IC DATE dd mm yy hh mm ss ms DEMAND IG KA DEMAND IG MAX KA DEMAND IG DATE dd mm yy ...

Страница 354: ...ltage Table 6 43 VOLTAGE SECONDARY VALUES DESCRIPTION UNITS Phasor Ia A RMS Ia A Phasor Ib A RMS Ib A Phasor Ic A RMS Ic A Phasor In A Phasor Ig A RMS Ig A Phasor Isg A RMS Isg A Zero seq I0 A Positive Seq I1 A Negative Seq I2 A DESCRIPTION UNITS Phasor Vab V Phasor Vbc V Phasor Vca V Phasor Van V Phasor Vbn V Phasor Vcn V Phasor Vn V Positive Seq V1 V Negative Seq V2 V Zero Seq V0 V Phasor Vx V N...

Страница 355: ...culated and therefore its value will be zero For the three phase power value the system uses the ARON method or two wattmeters method DESCRIPTION UNITS Phase A Apparent Pwr VA Phase B Apparent Pwr VA Phase C Apparent Pwr VA Phase A Real Pwr W Phase B Real Pwr W Phase C Real Pwr W Phase A Reactive Pwr VARS Phase B Reactive Pwr VARS Phase C Reactive Pwr VARS 3 Phase Apparent Pwr VA 3 Phase Real Pwr ...

Страница 356: ...rent values phase to phase phase to ground and sequence values provided by the unit The angles provided by the unit are clockwise all the angles are positive values so for a system Va 0 0 Vb 0 120 Vc 0 120 the relay will provided the following angles Va 0 0 Vb 0 120 Vc 0 240 The following figure shows the phasor diagram provided by EnerVista 650 Setup Figure 6 2 PHASOR DIAGRAM ...

Страница 357: ... F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 6 3 METERING 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 6 3 4 FREQUENCY Actual Metering Frequency Table 6 45 FREQUENCY VALUES DESCRIPTION UNITS Line Frequency Hz Bus Frequency Hz df dt Hz s ...

Страница 358: ...4 CC4 CONT IP_X_CC20 CC20 CONT IP_X_CC4 CC4 CONT IP_X_CC5 CC5 CONT IP_X_CC5 CC5 CONT IP_X_CC5 CC5 CONT IP_X_CC21 CC21 CONT IP_X_CC5 CC5 CONT IP_X_CC6 CC6 CONT IP_X_CC6 CC6 CONT IP_X_CC6 CC6 CONT IP_X_CC22 CC22 CONT IP_X_CC6 CC6 CONT IP_X_CC7 CC7 CONT IP_X_CC7 CC7 CONT IP_X_CC7 CC7 CONT IP_X_CC23 CC23 CONT IP_X_CC7 CC7 CONT IP_X_CC8 CC8 CONT IP_X_CC8 CC8 CONT IP_X_CC8 CC8 CONT IP_X_CC24 CC24 CONT I...

Страница 359: ...tes Board X being X the corresponding board in each case Table 6 48 CONTACT OUTPUTS OPERATES These screens are available for all boards incorporated in the relay model which can be F G H and or J This screen shows the activated or deactivated status of those variables used internally to operate a contact output Signals shown on this screen are configured in the Outputs screen inside the Setpoint R...

Страница 360: ...t will remain unlit Table 6 49 CONTACT OUTPUT RESETS The last LED in this screen labeled as Board Status indicates the general board status This output reset Command will only be effective if the latch option has been selected for the Output Type setting on the I O board thus when the contact output has been configured to emulate function 86 latching relay Configuration for the contact output rese...

Страница 361: ...tual Input Latched Virtual Input Self Reset Virtual Inputs are signals transmitted by communications The EnerVista 650 Setup provides a tool to set virtual inputs through ModBus at Setpoint Inputs Outputs Virtual inputs that is only available in on line mode communicating to the relay There are two available groups of 32 signals each Latched inputs and Self reset inputs and all of them can be used...

Страница 362: ...t This screen provides the status of the 64 UserSt remote outputs Table 6 54 USER ST STATUS Actual Inputs Outputs Remote Outputs Remote GOOSE Dig Outputs This screen provides the status of the 32 Remote GOOSE Digital Outputs Table 6 55 REMOTE GOOSE DIGITAL OUTPUTS STATUS DNA STATUS DNA 1 DNA 2 DNA 3 DNA 32 USERST STATUS UserSt 1 UserSt 2 UserSt 3 UserSt 64 REMOTE GOOSE DIG OUTPUTS STATUS Rem GOOSE...

Страница 363: ... GOOSE DIG INPUTS STATUS Actual Inputs Outputs Remote Outputs Remote GOOSE Analog Inputs This screen provides the values of the 16 Remote GOOSE Analog Inputs Eight of them are float type and the other eight are integer type Table 6 59 REMOTE GOOSE ANALOG INPUTS STATUS REMOTE INPUTS STATUS Remote Input 1 Remote Input 2 Remote Input 3 Remote Input 32 REMOTE DEVICE STATUS Remote Device 1 Remote Devic...

Страница 364: ... 41 6 ACTUAL VALUES 6 4 INPUTS OUTPUTS 6 6 4 10 ANALOG INPUTS Actual Inputs Outputs Analog Intputs Board X This screen provides the values of the analog inputs ANALOG INPUTS VALUES Analog_Inp_X_01 Analog_Inp_X_02 Analog_Inp_X_03 Analog_Inp_X_08 ...

Страница 365: ...tions available on this screen are as follows Save It allows saving the Snapshot events information obtained in the relay in a CSV format file Print It allows printing the viewed data View data It allows to view the information contained in the selected event such as the event number date and time cause of the event as well as the voltage and current values in the moment of the event see Figure 6 ...

Страница 366: ...COM3 It is the same type of screen as shown on all snapshot event retrieval 6 5 1 3 CONTROL EVENTS Actual Records Event Recorder Control Events This screen is identical to the previous ones The difference is that this screen will display only control events i e those events configured in section Setpoint Relay Configuration Events There are a total of 128 configurable events and 64 non configurabl...

Страница 367: ...ETUP The screen will show all the available records in the Relay and by clicking on each of them the system will display the heading information for that record allowing downloading the information to a disk Once the file to be downloaded has been selected the oscillography record can be opened using GE OSC software GE OSC is GE proprietary software that is not distributed together with EnerVista ...

Страница 368: ...al of all the information stored up to that moment 6 5 3 FAULT REPORT When selecting the Actual Records Fault Report menu EnerVista 650 Setup will show the following screen indicating the fault reports available in the relay Figure 6 10 FAULT REPORT RETRIEVAL VIA ENERVISTA 650 SETUP When selecting one of the records a new screen will detail the following information Date Time Pre fault current and...

Страница 369: ...up to that moment 6 5 4 DATA LOGGER The access menu is Actual Records Data Logger Once open this menu will show a screen containing the information monitored by the relay according to the settings adjusted at Setpoint Product Setup Data Logger where the user can select which analog channels will be recorded as well as the sampling rate It must be taken into account that any settings change in the ...

Страница 370: ...it pairs are UserSt bit pairs which are status bits representing user definable events The IEC61850 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and receiving devices Each transmitting device will send a GSSE GOOSE message upon a successful power up when the state of any included point changes or after a specified interval the default up...

Страница 371: ...ing is used to select specific remote devices by entering the exact identification ID assigned to those devices The Remote Devices can be displayed in F650 relay Actual Values Input Outputs Remote Inputs Remote Device1 32 and ONLY programmed and displayed in the EnerVista 650 Setup if remote comms setting is set to GSSE see Figure 7 1 Setpoint Input Outputs Remote Comms Remote Device 1 32 Actual I...

Страница 372: ...tputs Remote Inputs Remote Input The Default Value 1 32 setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or the remote device sending the point is declared to be non communicating The following choices are available ON value defaults the input to Logic 1 OFF value defaults the input to Logic 0 Latest OFF freezes the input in case of lost communications I...

Страница 373: ... point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific PLC operand except DNA1 and DNA2 that are reserved The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function to be transmitted They are displayed in the F650 relay Actual Values Input Outputs Remote Outputs DNA Each DNA point can be ONLY programmed and displayed in EnerVista 650 Setup see figure 2 Setpoint Relay Configura...

Страница 374: ...ogrammed to carry the state of a specific PLC operand The setting above is used to select the operand which represents a specific UserSt function to be transmitted They are displayed in EnerVista 650 Setup Actual Values Input Outputs Remote Outputs User St Each User Set point can be ONLY programmed and displayed in EnerVista 650 Setup see Figure 3 Setpoint Relay Configuration Remote Outputs Actual...

Страница 375: ...t Management Part 5 Communication Requirements for Functions and Device Models 1 1 2 Configuration Part 6 Configuration Description Language For Communication In Electrical Substa tions Related To IEDs 1 1 3 Testing Part 10 Conformance Testing 1 1 4 Data Models Basic Communication Structure for Substations and Feeder Equipment Part 7 4 Compatible Logical Node Classes and Data Classes Part 7 3 Comm...

Страница 376: ...f the data objects referred to as Logical Nodes is found in part 7 4 In as much as many of the data objects are made up of common pieces such as Status Control Measurement Substitution the concept of Common Data Classes or CDC was developed which defined common building blocks for creating the larger data objects The CDC elements are defined in part 7 3 Given the data and services abstract definit...

Страница 377: ...is employed by the F650 to detect dead connections If there is no data traffic on a TCP connection for greater than 30 seconds the connection will be aborted by the server Therefore when using IEC61850 reporting clients should configure report control block items such that an integrity report will be issued al least every 30 seconds If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection al least...

Страница 378: ...mentation extra Information for Testing TICS Technical Issues Conformance Statement 7 2 7 2 DEFINITIONS OF THE ISO OSI REFERENCE MODEL Communications are based on the OSI Reference Model OSI IEC 7498 1 for a multi layer communication function to achieve stable data exchange The table below shows the ISO Application A and Transport T profiles An ISO A profile is a set of specifications and declarat...

Страница 379: ...amily rev1 4 firm3_60 TICS for 650 family of relays v1_7 firm3_60 PIXIT for 650 family of relays v1_5 firm3_60 7 2 7 3 1 PICS FOR 650 FAMILY OF RELAYS Reference documentation PICS for 650 family rev1_7 firm3_60 This document describes the ACSI Conformance Statement PICS Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for 650 family of relays 1 ACSI Conformance Statement The following ACSI conformanc...

Страница 380: ... Y Both GSSE and GOOSE B32 Subscriber side Y Both GSSE and GOOSE TRANSMISSION OF SAMPLED VALUE MODEL SVC B41 Publisher side N B42 Subscriber side N CLIENT SUBSCRIBER SERVER PUBLISHER VALUE COMMENTS If Server side B11 supported M1 Logical device Y M2 Logical node Y M3 Data Y M4 Data set Y M5 Substitution N M6 Setting group control Y Reporting M7 Buffered report control Y M7 1 sequence number Y M7 2...

Страница 381: ...ryID N N M12 2 DataRefInc N N M13 GSSE Y Y If SVC B41 B42 supported M14 Multicast SVC N M15 Unicast SVC N M16 Time Y Time source with required accuracy shall be available M17 File Transfer Y SERVICES AA TP MC CLIENT SUBSCRIBER SERVER PUBLISHER COMMENTS Server Clause 6 S1 ServerDirectory TP Y Application association Clause 7 S2 Associate Y S3 Abort Y S4 Release Y Logical device Clause 8 S5 LogicalD...

Страница 382: ...1 ConfirmEditSGValues TP Y S22 GetSGValues TP Y S23 GetSGCBValues TP Y Reporting Clause 14 Buffered report control block BRCB S24 Report TP Y S24 1 data change dchg Y S24 2 qchg change qchg N S24 3 data update dupd N S25 GetBRCBValues TP Y S26 SetBRCBValues TP Y Unbuffered report control block URCB S27 Report TP Y S27 1 data change dchg Y S27 2 qchg change qchg N S27 3 data update dupd N S28 GetUR...

Страница 383: ...essage MC Y S41 GetGsReference TP N S42 GetGSSEElementNumber TP N S43 GetGsCBValues TP Y S44 SetGsCBValues TP Y Transmission of sampled value model SVC Clause 16 Multicast SVC S45 SendMSVMessage MC N S46 GetMSVCBValues TP N S47 SetMSVCBValues TP N Unicast SVC S48 SendUSVMessage TP N S49 GetUSVCBValues TP N S50 SetUSVCBValues TP N Control Clause 17 5 1 S51 Select Y S52 SelectWithValue TP Y S53 Canc...

Страница 384: ...he item is not within the scope of this standard F S Functional Standard Should be applied Base Shall be applied in any application claiming conformance to this standard 2 2 Profile conformance The following tables define the basic conformance statement 2 2 1 PICS for A Profile support Time Clause 5 5 T1 Time resolution of internal clock 10 Nearest negative power of 2 in seconds T2 Time accuracy o...

Страница 385: ...mment realized realized T1 TCP IP T profile N Y T2 OSI T profile N N T3 GOOSE GSE T profile Y Y Only GOOSE not GSE management T4 GSSE T profile Y Y T5 TimeSync T profile Y N InitiateRequest Client CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range InitiateRequest localDetailCalling Y proposedMaxServOutstandingCalling Y ProposedMaxServOustandingCalled Y InitRequestDetail Y InitiateRequestDetail...

Страница 386: ...Attributes N deleteVariableAccess N defineNamedVariableList N getNamedVariableListAttributes Y deleteNamedVariableList N defineNamedType N getNamedTypeAttributes N deleteNamedType N Input N Output N takeControl N relinquishControl N defineSemaphore N deleteSemaphore N reportPoolSemaphoreStatus N reportSemaphoreStatus N initiateDownloadSequence N downloadSegment N terminateDownloadSequence N initia...

Страница 387: ...EventEnrollmentAttributes N acknowledgeEventNotification N getAlarmSummary N getAlarmEnrollmentSummary N readJournal N writeJournal N initializeJournal N reportJournalStatus N createJournal N deleteJournal N FileOpen Y FileRead Y FileClose Y fileRename N fileDelete N fileDirectory Y unsolicitedStatus N informationReport Y eventNotification N attachToEventCondition N attachToSemaphore N Conclude Y ...

Страница 388: ...ange STR1 Y STR2 Y VNAM Y VALT Y VADR N VSCA N TPY N VLIS Y REAL N CEI N NEST Y 7 ACO N SEM N CSR N CSNC N CSPLC N CSPI N GetNameList Client CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range Request ObjectClass Y ObjectScope Y DomainName Y ContinueAfter Y Response List Of Identifier Y MoreFollows Y Response Error Type Y NOTE Object class vmd formerly VMDSpecific in MMS V1 0 shall not appear I...

Страница 389: ...accessSelection Y component Y index N indexRange N allElements N alternateAccess Y selectAccess Y component Y index N indexRange N allElements N VariableAccessSpecification Client CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range listOfVariable Y variableSpecification Y alternateAccess Y variableListName Y VariableSpecification Client CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range nam...

Страница 390: ...t variableAccessSpecification Y listOfData Y Response failure Y success Y InformationReport Client CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range Request variableAccessSpecification Y listOfAccessResult Y GetVariableAccessAttributes Client CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range Request name Y address N Response mmsDeletable Y address N typeSpecification Y GetNamedVariableLi...

Страница 391: ...nt CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range Request filespecification Y continueAfter Y Response listOfDirectoryEntry Y MoreFollows Y FileOpen Client CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range Request filename Y initialPosition Y Response frsmID Y fileAttributes Y FileRead Client CR Server CR realized Value range realized Value range Request FrsmID Y Response FileData Y m...

Страница 392: ...ical Nodes LPHD Physical device information LLN0 Logical node zero P Logical Nodes for protection functions PIOC Instantaneous overcurrent PTOC Time overcurrent PTOF Overfrequency PTOV Overvoltage PTUV Undervoltage PTUF Underfrequency R Logical nodes for protection related functions RDIR Directional element RREC Autoreclosing C Logical Nodes for control CSWI Switch controller G Logical Nodes for g...

Страница 393: ...O E Notes LPHD Physical device information M Data Common Logical Node Information PhyNam DPL Physical device name plate M PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M LLN0 class Attribute Name Attribute Type Explanation M O E Notes LLN0 Logical node zero Data Common Logical Node Information Mod INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M Nam...

Страница 394: ...ED8 GO VID UNSIGNED16 GO APPID UNSIGNED16 GO SGCB class Attribute Name Attribute Type FC Notes NumOfSG INT8U SP Total number of settings group available in the logical device Fixed as 3 ActSG INT8U SP Setting group whose values are used by a logical node to performing its function Values 1 2 or 3 EditSG INT8U SP Setting group whose values can be set Values 1 2 or 3 CnfEdit BOOLEAN SP LActTm Timest...

Страница 395: ... FOR F650 7 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7 Note ACT includes origin attribute in ST this is implemented according to Tissue 68 InMagTyp ING Input Type E Phasor o RMS RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay E Reset Delay 0 900000 Units in milliseconds PIOCEna SPG Function IOC enable E Function ...

Страница 396: ...NS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status Information Str ACD Start O IOC PKP Op ACT Operate M IOC OP Blk ACT Blk E IOC BLK Settings StrVal ASG Start value M Pickup Level 0 05 160 OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time E Trip Delay 0 900000 Units in miliseconds RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay E Reset Delay 0 900000 Units in miliseconds PIOCEna SPG Function IOC enable E Function PIOC class Attribute Name Attrib...

Страница 397: ... Str ACD Start M TOC PKP Op ACT Operate M TOC OP Blk ACT Block E TOC BLK Settings TmACrv CURVE Operating curve type M Curve StrVal ASG Start value O Pickup Level 0 05 160 TmMult ASG Time dial multiplier O TD Multiplier 0 900 RsMod ING Reset Mode E Reset instantaneous lineal InMagTyp ING Input Type E Input Phasor RMS VolRst SPG Voltage Restraint E enable Disable PTOCEna SPG Function TOC enable E Fu...

Страница 398: ...tion Str ACD Start M TOC PKP Op ACT Operate M TOC OP Blk ACT Block E TOC BLK Settings TmACrv CURVE Operating curve type M Curve StrVal ASG Start value O Pickup Level 0 05 160 TmMult ASG Time dial multiplier O TD Multiplier 0 900 RsMod ING Reset Mode E Reset instantaneous lineal InMagTyp ING Input Type E Input Phasor RMS PTOCEna SPG Function TOC enable E Function PTOF class Attribute Name Attribute...

Страница 399: ...tus Information Str ACD Start M TOV PKP Op ACT Operate O TOV OP Blk ACT Block E TOV BLK Settings StrVal ASG Start Value O Pickup Level 3 300 OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Trip Delay 0 900000 Units in miliseconds RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O Reset Delay 0 900000 Units in miliseconds PhLogic ING Logic Mode E Logic Any two all phases PTOVEna SPG Function TOV enable E Function PTOV class Attrib...

Страница 400: ... Attribute Type Explanation M O E Notes PTOV Overvoltage Data Common Logical Node Information Mod INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status Information Str ACD Start M TOV PKP Op ACT Operate O TOV OP Blk ACT Block E TOV BLK Settings StrVal ASG Start Value O Pickup Level 3 300 OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Trip Delay 0 900000 Units in miliseco...

Страница 401: ...d INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status Information Str ACD Start M TUV PKP Op ACT Operate M TUV OP Blk ACT Block E TUV BLK StrPhGn ACD Start E TUV Phase Gnd PKP OpPhGn ACT Operate E TUV Phase Gnd OP StrPhPh ACD Start E TUV Phase Phase PKP OpPhPh ACT Operate E TUV Phase Phase OP Settings TmVCrv CURVE_2 Operating curve type O Curve definitive ...

Страница 402: ... INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status Information Str ACD Start M TUV PKP Op ACT Operate M TUV OP Blk ACT Block E TUV BLK Settings TmVCrv CURVE_2 Operating curve type O Curve definitive inverse StrVal ASG Start value O Pickup Level 3 300 TmMult ASG Time dial multiplier O Delay 0 900 PTUVEna SPG Function TUV enable E Function PTUF class Attribute Name Attribute Type Explanation M O E Notes P...

Страница 403: ...ame Attribute Type Explanation M O E Notes RDIR Directional Element Data Common Logical Node Information Mod INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status Information Dir ACD Direction M Fixed to unknown value Op ACT Operate E Phase Dir OP Blk ACT Block E Phase Dir Block BlkIn ACT Phase Dir Blk Inp E Phase Dir Blk Inp Settings ChrAng ASG Characterist...

Страница 404: ...Dir Block BlkIn ACT Neutral Dir Blk Inp E Neutral Dir Blk Inp Settings ChrAng ASG Characteristic Angle O 90 90 MTA BlkValV ASG Minimun operating current O 0 300 Pol V Threshold PolOpMod ING Direction E Reverse Forward BlkMod ING Block Logica E Prmission Blocked RDIREna SPG Function Permission E Enable Disable PolQty ING Polarisation O VO IP VO IP VO IP RDIR class Attribute Name Attribute Type Expl...

Страница 405: ... Directional Element Data Common Logical Node Information Mod INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status Information Dir ACD Direction M Fixed to unknown value Op ACT Operate E Sens Gnd Dir OP Blk ACT Block E Sens Gnd Dir Block BlkIn ACT Sens Gnd Dir Blk Inp E Sens Gnd Dir Blk Inp Settings ChrAng ASG Characteristic Angle O 90 90 MTA BlkValV ASG Mi...

Страница 406: ...tatus Information Op ACT Operate M AR Close Breaker AutoRecSt INS Auto Reclosing status M AR Status AutoRecLo INS Auto Reclosing Lockout Status E AR Lockout Mode AutoRecBlk INS Auto Reclosing Block Status E AR Block Mode Settings Rec1Tmms ING First Reclose Time O Dead Time 1 Units in miliseconds Rec2Tmms ING Second Reclose Time O Dead Time 2 Units in miliseconds Rec3Tmms ING Third Reclose Time O D...

Страница 407: ...s that control commands cannot be sent directly via XSWI LN Control commands have to be sent via CSWI LN In CSWI LN for Pos controllable attribute all possible control models are applicable direct control with normal security SBO control with normal security direct control with enhanced security SBO control with enhanced security The sboTimeout attribute for Pos is configurable in a range from 500...

Страница 408: ...h INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status information BoardSt SPS Board Status E Board Status True board present and working correctly False board not present board present and board model mismatch board present and hardware failure Ind1 SPS General Indication binary input O Contact Input 1 Ind2 SPS General Indication binary input O Contact Input 2 Ind32 SPS General Indication binary input O C...

Страница 409: ...tion Mod INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Controls DPCSO1 geDPC Double point controllable status output O Latched Virtual Input 1 2 DPCSO2 geDPC Double point controllable status output O Latched Virtual Input 3 4 DPCSO16 geDPC Double point controllable status output O Latched Virtual Input 31 32 SPCSO1 SPC Single point controllable status outpu...

Страница 410: ...M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status information Ind1 SPS General Indication binary input O Control Event 1 Ind2 SPS General Indication binary input O Control Event 2 Ind128 SPS General Indication binary input O Control Event 128 Ind129 SPS General Indication binary input O Switchgear 1 event 1 Ind130 SPS General Indication binary input O Switchgear 1 event 2 Ind131 SPS General Indication binary input...

Страница 411: ... INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Status information Ind1 SPS General Indication binary input O Remote Digital Input 1 Ind2 SPS General Indication binary input O Remote Digital Input 2 Ind32 SPS General Indication binary input O Remote Digital Input 32 AnIn1 SPS Analogue input O Remote Analogue Input 1 AnIn2 SPS Analogue input O Remote Analogue...

Страница 412: ...ulse counter O Pulse Counter 4 CntPsWh MV Positive Wat Counter O CntNgWh MV Negative Wat Counter O CntPsVArh MV Positive VAR Counter O CntNgVArh MV Negative VAR Counter O MMXU class Attribute Name Attribute Type Explanation M O E Notes MMXU Measurement Data Common Logical Node Information Mod INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Measured values Tot...

Страница 413: ...nation M O E Notes XCBR Circuit breaker Data Common Logical Node Information Mod INC Mode M Status only Beh INS Behaviour M Health INS Health M NamPlt LPL Name plate M Number of Switchgear Loc SPS Local operation M Local Remote OpCnt INS Operation counter M Breaker openings Controls Pos geDPC Switch position M Breaker open close und BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Status only BlkCls SPC Block closing M...

Страница 414: ...t attribute for Pos is configurable in a range from 500 ms to 60 seconds The sboClass attribute for Pos can only have value 0 operate once 2 7 2 XSWI Circuit switch In the F650 there are up to 16 configurable switchgears Currently four XSWI and four CSWI are implemented and mapped to first nine switchgears in F650 XSWI and CSWI Logical Nodes can be seen as paired objects in F650 as one pair of XSW...

Страница 415: ...te Time Y 16 Definite Time 16 Reserved N 17 Definable curve 1 based on formula x f y A B C D E F Y 0 IEEE Ext Inv 18 Definable curve 2 based on formula x f y A B C D E F Y 1 IEEE Very Inv 19 Definable curve 3 based on formula x f y A B C D E F Y 2 IEEE Mod Inv 20 Definable curve 4 based on formula x f y A B C D E F Y 8 IAC Ext Inv 21 Definable curve 5 based on formula x f y A B C D E F Y 9 IAC Ver...

Страница 416: ...ve D 37 Vendor specific curve 5 defined by n pairs x y N 38 Vendor specific curve 6 defined by n pairs x y N 39 Vendor specific curve 7 defined by n pairs x y N 40 Vendor specific curve 8 defined by n pairs x y N 41 Vendor specific curve 9 defined by n pairs x y N 42 Vendor specific curve 10 defined by n pairs x y N 43 Vendor specific curve 11 defined by n pairs x y N 44 Vendor specific curve 12 d...

Страница 417: ...e to Phase Voltages N 6 Phase to Ground Voltages N Enum type AutoRecSt Value Description supported new enum value added Comments 1 Definite Trip Y Specified by Tissue 133 1 Ready Y 2 In Progress Y 3 Successful Y 4 Unsuccessful Y Specified by Tissue 3 Enum type InMagTyp Value Description supported new enum value added Value of 650 Relay setting 0 phasor Y Y PHASOR DFT 1 rms Y Y RMS Enum type RsMod ...

Страница 418: ... tissues they are not yet included in the test procedures either because they are just a recom mendation or optional within the IEC 61850 documents or because their respective proposals are not defined in such detail to be implemented or tested or because they are simply not applicable just editorial with no change for implementation and testing The supported Sup column indicates Y yes the tissue ...

Страница 419: ... A 7 N A 8 Y 9 N A 10 Y 11 N A 12 N A 13 N A 14 N A 15 N A 16 N A 17 N A 18 N A 24 N A 130 N A 157 N A 169 N A 170 N A 176 N A 186 Y Technically it would be possible to include Control Block s attributes as Data Set members however Data Sets in this device are fixed and it is not possible to modify them 197 N A 201 N A 211 N A 245 N A IEC 61850 Part 7 2 29 N A 30 N A 31 N A 32 N A 33 N A 34 N A 35...

Страница 420: ... A No CDC APC present in Data Model 54 N A 55 N A 56 N A 57 N A 58 N A 59 N A 60 N A 61 N A 62 N A 63 N A 64 N A 65 N A 68 Y In ACT CDC s attribute origin is present in ST FC 138 N A 161 N A 164 N A 171 Y 182 N A 205 N A 213 N A 217 N A 219 N A IEC 61850 Part 7 4 69 N A 70 N A 71 N A 72 N A 73 N A No SIMG SIML logical nodes in Data Model 74 N A 75 N A No GAPC logical node in Data Model 76 N A 77 N...

Страница 421: ...a Model 94 N A 95 N A 96 N A No GSAL logical node in Data Model 97 N A 98 N A 99 N A 100 N A 101 N A No RDRE RADR RBDR logical nodes in Data Model 102 N A 104 N 105 N A 106 N A 107 N A 108 N A 133 Y 134 N A 145 N A 147 N A Mod Beh always have value 1 148 N A 216 N A IEC 61850 Part 8 1 109 N A This Tissue is informational only 110 N A 111 N A 112 N A 113 N A 114 N A 115 N A 116 Y 117 N A 118 N 119 ...

Страница 422: ...s document Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC 61850 10 1 Pixit For Association Model Tissue No Supported Y N N A Comments about implementation IEC 61850 Part 9 2 124 N A 125 N A 126 N A 127 N A 139 N A Description Value Clarification Maximum number of clients that can set up an association simultaneously 5 Lost connection detection time ran...

Страница 423: ...hat is the maximum number of data values in one SetDataValues request MMS PDU SIZE 4 Additional Items Behaviour of stepSize attribute checks When a client attempts to write value of setVal CDC ING or setMag CDC ASG which is not a multiple of stepSize attribute of assciated CF then the device will truncate the value to the nearest stepSize not greater than the value intended to be written Descripti...

Страница 424: ...al or smaller than the EntryID in BRCB This is because the client should only request retransmission of reports that had already been sent GI reports Can be triggered independently from the GI bit in TrgOps Behaviour at buffer overflow When buffer overflow occurs all reports generated after buffer overflow will have the BufOvfl flag set To stop sending reports with the BufOvfl flag the client shou...

Страница 425: ...setting if not the status of the internal variable Remote Device goes to OFFLINE N timeAllowedtoLive Y datSet should match setting if not the status of the internal variable Remote Device goes to OFFLINE Y goID should match setting if not the status of then internal variable Remote Device goes to OFFLINE N t N stNum N sqNum N test Y confRev should match setting if not the status of the internal va...

Страница 426: ... t N stNum N sqNum Y numDatSetEntries What is the behaviour when one subscribed GSSE message isn t received or syntactically incorrect missing GSSE A single missing GSSE message is ignored What is the behaviour when one subscribed GSSE message exceeds the previous time Allowed to Live TAL It signals this GSSE as offline What is the behaviour when a subscribed GSSE message is out of order Sequence ...

Страница 427: ...t not ok respond with Operate request Not applicable Which origin categories are supported What happens if the orCat is not supported orCat values are checked only for XCBR1 CO Pos The permision to do the operation depends on the position of LOCAL REMOTE switch on the front panel of relay and also on the orCat value received The following table shows the behaviour Yes means operation is permitted ...

Страница 428: ...e pending operation finilized sucessfully or the 30 seconds timeout elapses Description Value Clarification What quality bits are supported N LeapSecondsKnown Y ClockFailure Y ClockNotSynchronized What is the behaviour when the time synchronization signal messages are lost Internal clock is used When is the quality bit Clock failure set It is set when SNTP packet with LI field Leap Indicator with ...

Страница 429: ... Note For firmware versions lower than 3 60 the tool for IEC 61850 is located in Setpoint 61850 configuration only for basic configuration purposes Domain name parameters Ethernet parameters MMXU parameters with this tool the user can configure some 61850 parameter in the F650 icd file and then send this file to the relay For more detail information see chapter 5 11 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATION 7 3 2 I...

Страница 430: ... communicating with a relay when the Receive IEC 61850 file from device menu is selected the program will pop up a menu asking to introduce the IP Address for the unit After retrieving the files all the ICD data will be displayed in the ICD CID tab and the user can start configuring the IEC 61850 protocol d SEND IEC 61850 FILE TO DEVICE The user can send the IEC 61850 files to the 650 relays using...

Страница 431: ... 61850 from device option the Enervista software starts to retrieve configuration files from F650 device Figure 7 7 GETTING 61850 FILES The main configuration window will appear as can be seen in the following figure Figure 7 8 MAIN CONFIGURATION WINDOW The IEC 61850 Configurator window in Enervista 650 Setup is composed of four main tabs ICD CID Reports GOOSE Reception GOOSE Transmission ...

Страница 432: ...elect between Buffered Reports or Unbuffered Reports Configure Reports Control Block parameters GOOSE Reception Configure reception part for GOOSE messages GOOSE Transmission Configure transmission part for GOOSE messages a ICD CID CONFIGURATION TAB The ICD Explorer window allows the user to navigate through the ICD file The data is organized in a hierarchical mode The user can browse through the ...

Страница 433: ...e settings located in the relay s e2prom and the changes performed on the ICD settings for the protection and control functions will only be stored on the ICD file but not updated in the relay If this setting is set to true the user is selecting the ICD file settings to prevail over the relay settings This means that after changing settings in the ICD and powering the relay off and on the unit wil...

Страница 434: ...igure 7 11 CONFIGURATION OF COMMUNICATION SETTINGS ICD STATUS UNKNOWN when the relay has not the IEC61850 protocol in the relay model the ICD status is unknow to the unit ICD ERROR There is an error in the ICD file and the relay ICD is not operative To solve this issue it is necessary to send a correct ICD to the relay using the IEC61850 configurator tool When the ICD error is raised the IEC 61850...

Страница 435: ...V_B28 IEDNAME must start with letter MMXU PARAMETERS DEADBANDS DB OF MEASUREMENT VALUES Figure 7 12 CONFIGURATION OF DEABANDS FOR MEASUREMENTS The MMXU deadband settings represent the deadband values used to determine when updating the MMXU mag and cVal values from the associated instmag and instcVal values The mag and cVal values are used for the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reports These se...

Страница 436: ... the difficulty to calculate a common deadband for both values angle and magnitude In these cases it is advisable to use integrity report in firmware versions lower than 5 00 Starting from firmware version 5 00 the 650 family of relays implement separate deadbands for magnitude and angle for phasors voltages and currents Thus for example phase A current attribute contains in 650 relay two deadband...

Страница 437: ...attribute DPCSO always operate on two Virtual Inputs Latched one Virtual Input of the pair is set to 1 and the other Virtual Input of the pair is set to 0 Controllable data in XCBR and CSWI logical nodes are Pos position objects These are operations used to change state of breaker or switch F650 relay supports all four IEC 61850 control modes ctlModel which are Direct control with normal security ...

Страница 438: ...mple of this can be Virtual Outputs which are internal variables of F650 derived from PLC logic equations In Control Events of Relay Configuration menu the user is allowed to select any digital signal of F650 and this signal will be mapped to eveGGIO1 status indication Clients can utilize the IEC 61850 buffered and unbuffered reporting features as there is a Data Set with eveGGIO1 elements in orde...

Страница 439: ...n it is not When the setting group function is enabled the F650 relay has the following instances of the Logical Nodes mentioned before PIOC Phase instantaneous overcurrent SGphHiPIOC1 and SGphLoPIOC1 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent SGndPIOC1 Ground instantaneous overcurrent SGgndPIOC1 Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent SGhsePIOC1 PTOC Phase time overcurrent SGphHiPTOC1 and SGphLoPTOC1 N...

Страница 440: ... IEC 61850 Configurator as it is shown in the figure Figure 7 15 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR The setting grouping permission could be enabled or disabled via IEC61850 Configurator setting Use Setting Group to true using the HMI of the relay or with the menu Setpoint Control Elements Setting Group of the EnerVista 650 Setup program as it is shown in the figure Figure 7 16 CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP ...

Страница 441: ...tes are shown and configured setting ActSG with the value 1 that corresponds with the first setting group in the F650 relay and EditSG with the value 2 that corresponds with the second setting group Figure 7 17 MMS OBJECT EXPLORER The settings for the groups 1 and 2 of high level of Phase Time Overcurrent protection function are shown in the next figures Figure 7 18 ...

Страница 442: ...g group indicated with the ActSg are the ones with the FC SG in Logical Node SGphHiPTOC1 therefore the ones used by the high level of Phase Time Overcurrent protection function in the relay Figure 7 20 On the other hand as it is shown in the figure the values of the settings of the setting group indicated with the EditSg are the ones with the FC SE in Logical Node SGphHiPTOC1 ...

Страница 443: ...7 74 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 7 3 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR 7 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7 Figure 7 21 ...

Страница 444: ...maximum of 5 different IEC 61850 clients can connect to it For unbuffered reports only one URCB Unbuffered Report Control Block in this way all clients can connect to the same URCB for instance to LLN0 RP urcbA01 urcbA01 is the name of the URCB in this example For buffered reports each IEC 61850 client should connect to different BRCB Buffered Report Control Block This is necessary because F650 re...

Страница 445: ... button a new dialog window will appear where the user should specify the type of Report either Buffered or Unbuffered In case of Buffered Report the number of IEC 61850 clients has to be configured According to this value the appropriate number of Buffered Control Blocks will be created In case of Unbuffered Report the option of selecting the number of IEC 61850 clients is disabled as only one Un...

Страница 446: ...ty to increment number of control blocks of existing Buffered Report or when the user wants the same Report that was previously configured as Buffered to be also Unbuffered or vice versa If the user wants to create new Data Set then New DataSet should be chosen from the list For all new Data Sets by default the IEC 61850 Configurator sets the name of Data Set as REPORT1 REPORT2 etc After pressing ...

Страница 447: ...the right In F650 relay Data Sets for Reports can contain both Data Attributes FCDA Functionally Constrained Data Attributes and Data Objects FCD Functionally Constrained Data In order to delete elements from Data Set the user should select with the mouse the row or rows in the DataSet Elements table and press Delete button on keyboard It can also be done by mouse right clicking and selecting Dele...

Страница 448: ...r to Remove the Control Block Report please select with the mouse the name of Report Control Block and right click on it By selecting Remove Report the user can delete Report Control Blocks Figure 7 25 DELETING REPORTS In case of attempt to attach to URCB a Data Set that is already attached to another URCB the application will give the following error ...

Страница 449: ...t in conjunction with the existing ones will be maximum 5 BRCB s attached the this Data Set The following warning will appear I n case of attempt to attach a BRCB to a Data Set that already has 5 BRCB s attached the following error wil appear If the limit of 20 Report Control Blocks is exceeded the following error wil appear If the user tries to add more than 64 elements to the Data Set the follow...

Страница 450: ...ion ID number in the receiver A common number may be used for all GOOSE transmitters in a system More details are specified in IEC 61850 part 8 1 In Enervista 650 Setup the selection between GSSE or GOOSE messages is performed in Setpoint Inputs Outputs Remote Comms If GSSE has been selected then GSSE settings will appear in Setpoint Inputs Outputs Remote Comms menu If GOOSE has been selected then...

Страница 451: ...GOOSE In F650 Data Sets for configurable GOOSE both for reception and transmission can have a maximum of 64 elements The elements of Data Sets for transmission GOOSEs can only be leaf elements Data Attributes and cannot be complex structures Data Objects The elements of Data Sets for reception GOOSEs can be of any types supported in IEC 61850 standard and can be both leaf elements Data Attributes ...

Страница 452: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 7 83 7 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7 3 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR 7 Figure 7 26 TRANSMISSION GOOSE CONFIGURATION ...

Страница 453: ...s can be directly formed by attributes of all Logical Nodes For example they can contains status of protection functions as PTOC1 ST Op phsA Time Overcurrent Function 1 Operate Phase A PTUF2 ST Str general Underfrequency Function 2 Trip General XCBR1 ST Pos stVal Circuit Breaker Position etc There is also a dedicated logical node in F650 which can be used for mapping of internal signals to be tran...

Страница 454: ...sion GOOSE This Data Set if formed by 8 elements these elements are 4 first rouGGIO1 indications and its associated quality flags However no mapping is done by default to rouGGIO1 indication in Relay Configuration it must be done by the user with the desired signals Figure 7 28 EXAMPLE OF ROUGGIO MAPPING IN RELAY CONFIGURATION If the user tries to enable Fixed GOOSE but there are already 4 configu...

Страница 455: ...nclude a new IED for GOOSE reception Figure 7 29 EXAMPLE OF GOOSE RECEPTION CONFIGURATION After pressing a ADD IED a window will appear to select icd or cid file from disk there is also the possibility to import the icd file from and SCD When working with different devices it is advisable to set the IED Name to the position name of the device to avoid having different IEDs with the same IED name A...

Страница 456: ...ser perform the following options Add IED to add a new IED Remove IED to remove existing IEDs Update the IED from disk in case the configuration of that device has changed and we want to update it in our files Export ICD to disk Import IED s from SCD in case the ICD data is included in a SCD file Figure 7 30 EXAMPLE OF GOOSE RECEPTION OPTIONS ...

Страница 457: ...7 88 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 7 3 IEC 61850 CONFIGURATOR 7 IEC 61850 PROTOCOL 7 ...

Страница 458: ...onfirm the delete and if the Administrator chooses yes then the user whose Delete Entry box was checked will be permanently deleted from the list Admin WARNING When this box is checked the user will become an EnerVista 650 Setup Administrator therefore receiving all of the Administrative rights Actual Values When this box is checked the user will have the ability to view Actual Values and all reco...

Страница 459: ...ange Password Figure 8 1 CHANGE SECURITY When the operator enters a new password for the first time he she should also enter a personal question that only they could answer There is a limit of 50 characters available to enter the personal question One example as in the above diagram would be What is my mother s maiden name This question will be posed to the user if the user forgets their password ...

Страница 460: ...d are granted access as Administrator Security Control can be enabled through Security from the tool bar when logged on as an Administrator Click on User Management and a dialog box will show up Figure 8 2 SECURITY ENABLING Security Control is enabled by checking the ENABLE SECURITY check box The first time the enable security option is selected is necessary to close and open EnerVista 650 Setup t...

Страница 461: ...ser For the first log in session of any user name the default password will be password User will be prompt to change the password to something else after the first successfully log in Log on can also be done by clicking Security from the toolbar and choose Login New User User will be prompted with the same log in dialog box for a different user name and password combination In case a user has for...

Страница 462: ...00 2 20 5 00 5 00 NOTE A STEP LIST SUMMARY that will allow the user to control the upgrading process is included at the end of this section It is necessary to read paragraphs 9 2 1 to 9 4 2 of chapter 9 of manual GEK 106310 before accomplishing the F650 UPGRADE PROCEDURE Be aware that boot program and firmware upgrades will erase all the data contained in the relay thus it is advisable to save all...

Страница 463: ...a direct connection through a hub or switch In no one case upgrading will be done using a Local Area Network LAN Serial RS232 Communication Serial communication is necessary only to perform the bootware upgrade 3 Relay IP Address It must be assigned a IP address to the relay in the Ethernet parameters via HMI at PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION ETHERNET ETHERNET1 menu or via Enervista 650 Setup at SETP...

Страница 464: ...ot assigned to any other device to avoid collisions If there are not TCP IP settings according to this pattern in the computer it should be added in order to communicate with the relay following these steps In the PC go to STARTUP CONTROL PANEL NETWORK CONNECTIONS option Figure 9 2 NETWORK MENU IN PC CONTROL PANEL Choose NETWORK CONNECTION option and with Right mouse key select Properties Then in ...

Страница 465: ...TION PARAMETERS 9 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE 9 Figure 9 3 INTERNET PROTOCOL Figure 9 4 ACTUAL TCP IP PROPERTIES The new window open Figure 9 4 will show the actual PC IP address and other parameters Click Advanced button to add or modify the actual address ...

Страница 466: ...sses and Subnet mask shown in Figure 9 5 does not match the actual relay LAN pattern click the Add button The new window Figure 9 6 allows to add a new address in the PC corresponding to the same relay LAN pattern Figure 9 6 NEW IP AND SUBNET MASK ADDRESSES FOR PC Windows allows Multihosting so it permits having as many IP addresses as desired It is necessary to turn OFF and ON the computer to act...

Страница 467: ...6310AB COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS In the computer check that a WIFI connection is disabled Check it at STARTUP CONTROL PANEL NETWORK CONNECTION WIRELESS NETWORK it must be disabled b There is only one communication board Check it at STARTUP CONTROL PANEL NETWORK CONNECTION LOCAL NETWORK Right mouse key Properties c There is only one IP address Check it at STARTUP CONTROL PANEL NETWORK CONNECTION LOC...

Страница 468: ... use the GE USB to Serial RS232 Cable Converter part number 0100 0001 4 When using USB to Serial RS232 cable it is necessary first to know the COM Port number the Laptop will use through the USB device Depending in the actual F650 upgrade task under operation the procedure is as follows 4 1 Firmware upgrade It is not necessary the use of serial cable 4 2 Bootware and firmware upgrade being the rel...

Страница 469: ...d in step 2 above if the connection is made directly from the PC to the relay it is necessary to use a 10 100 Base T crossover cable During the upgrade the system will show the following message indicating the procedure to be followed Figure 9 9 ETHERNET AND SERIAL CONNECTIONS MESSAGE If click Yes Si the next window will allow you to choose the Network adapter for your Ethernet connection to the r...

Страница 470: ...window to choose a temporary IP address will be shown It is advisable to set the same IP address that is going to be used lately in the relay for Ethernet connection Figure 9 11 SETTING ADDRESS 8 After entering the temporary IP Address the next new window will require the bootware file retrieved from www gedigitalenergy com and previously stored someplace in the PC ...

Страница 471: ... CODE FILE SELECTION 9 Choose the bootware file and click Open button Abrir The next screen will pop up Figure 9 13 LOADING BOOT CODE FILE 10 Then the program shows a message requiring switch OFF and ON the relay while the progress bar is in course to start the upgrading process Figure 9 14 RELAY SWITCH OFF ON MESSAGE ...

Страница 472: ...PDATE FILE ERROR MESSAGE 12 If the relay gets stuck during the upgrading process after switching OFF and ON the relay giving error message shown it is due to no serial communication via the front RS232 port Please check serial cable and serial settings connection At this point the relay will not be upgraded After switching it OFF and ON it will continue working with the former firmware and bootwar...

Страница 473: ...relay will be lost Until now no important change has been made to the relay the boot memory upgrading process has just been prepared The process of flash memory erasing and boot code downloading can take some minutes during which a progress bar is displayed Figure 9 18 FLASH MEMORY ERASE PROGRESS BAR 15 If the process is successful continue with step 16 hereafter If not and the relay gets stuck du...

Страница 474: ...he same screen with Right mouse key over LOCAL NETWORK click Enable and wait until Enabled status is shown 16 Once the memory has been erased and the files upgraded in the relay the parameters for the Ethernet communications must be set The requested values are the IP address and the gateway Figure 9 20 IP ADDRESS SETPOINT WINDOW These values should match the LAN structure where the relay will be ...

Страница 475: ... the firmware upgrading process the user could repeat the whole process as many times as necessary this is possible thanks to an independent boot memory bootcode 6 Pure firmware upgrading process should be done using the EnerVista 650 Setup software and Ethernet connection COM3 via Cross Over RJ45 Ethernet cable 9 3 2 FIRMWARE UPGRADE 1 Once the communication with the relay through Ethernet connec...

Страница 476: ...dress of the relay under upgraded and its serial number In versions 1 70 and higher it is also necessary to enter the ordering code for the relay See Figure 9 23 Figure 9 23 RELAY SERIAL NUMBER 2 If the relay under is not a enhanced model or control functionality then click the Upgrade Firmware button to continue the process Figure 9 24 Then the process will continue as per step 9 3 2 4 forward ...

Страница 477: ...9 16 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 9 3 FIRMWARE VERSION UPGRADE 9 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE 9 Figure 9 24 FIRMWARE UPGRADE ACCEPTANCE WINDOW Figure 9 25 ADVISORY FOR LOCAL NETWORK REBOOT ...

Страница 478: ...ss Figure 9 24 4 When upgrading models with Enhanced protection or control functionality see model selection the program will request a password to continue Figure 9 26 Figure 9 26 PASSWORD REQUIREMENT SPECIAL MODELS In case special functionality model with password requirement please contact GE Multilin The following parameters must be clearly indicated in the order Unit serial number Current mod...

Страница 479: ...firmware upgrade files upgrade txt Wherever from this Upgrade txt file would be obtained www gedigitalenergy com or from TS Dept at any GE Multilin facility then it must be saved in some directory in the root drive or in the desktop of teh PC Figure 9 28 FIRMWARE FILE ACCEPTANCE If the files are downloaded from the web they are compressed in a zip file Proceed to extract all files and save them in...

Страница 480: ...nge selection window will appear Figure 9 30 This voltage range is closely related to the serial number of the relay The EnerVista 650 Setup program automatically pre selects the appropriate voltage range for the unit based on the serial number showing the selection with a step line square over the proper option Click OK button Do not use the other option option not square signaled since it is ded...

Страница 481: ... AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE 9 Once OK button has been pressed a confirmation window will pop up as shown in Figure 9 31 Figure 9 31 UPGRADE INITIALIZATION 8 Press Yes Si button 9 Now the new window will show the Upgrade Firmware button ready to be enabled Figure 9 32 Press it to start upgrade ...

Страница 482: ...6310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller 9 21 9 BOOTCODE AND FIRMWARE UPGRADE 9 3 FIRMWARE VERSION UPGRADE 9 Figure 9 32 UPGRADE INITIATION During the process the program displays the files that are being upgraded ...

Страница 483: ...the files transfer is finished a message appears informing that it is necessary to wait sometime before resetting the unit in order to start working with the new firmware version in the relay Figure 9 33 11 When the whole process has finished a message will be displayed asking to switch the F650 on and off Figure 9 34 Figure 9 34 FIRMWARE FILE SELECTION ...

Страница 484: ...figuration and logic files to the relay in order to get it fully operative Calibration settings and configuration must be loaded to the relay the relay was bootware upgraded also If not calibration files were maintained during the firmware upgrading process To recover and download the different files to the relay go to Enervista 650 Setup and at the top menu bar choose COMMUNCATION CALIBRATION SET...

Страница 485: ... HUB OR SWITCH 3 SET THE APPROPRIATE IP ADDRESS IN THE RELAY 4 SET THE APPROPRIATE IP ADDRESS IN THE PC 5 FROM THE ENERVISTA 650 SETUP PROGRAM SELECT Communications Upgrade Firmware Version 6 ENTER THE IP ADDRESS SERIAL NUMBER AND ORDERING CODE OF THE RELAY TO UPGRADE 7 WHEN REQUIRED BY THE PROGRAM SWITCH OFF AND BACK ON THE RELAY 8 LOCATE THE UPGRADE TXT FILE ACCORDING TO THE MODEL OF THE RELAY 9...

Страница 486: ...ge during transportation and that all screws are correctly fixed and all relay terminal boards are in good condition Verify that the information shown on the relay front plate corresponds to the data shown on the display and to the requested relay model Display information Firmware version Kernel version F650 X XX K KK GENERAL ELECTRIC F650XXXXXXXXX 19200N81 MODBUS 254 Model ...

Страница 487: ...ple if an output is closed and the unit goes to out of service state the output will be kept closed even though the state that makes it to close change to open the output When the unit goes out of the out of service state the output will be opened if it was a change When the Out of Service status goes to ON or the setting has been changed to Enabled the ready led will also change to red color Be c...

Страница 488: ...ed for the testing contains wide harmonics the voltmeter and relay responses will be different Relays have been calibrated in factory using a Network of 50 or 60 Hz with a minimum harmonic content When the relay is tested a power supply network with no harmonics in its waveform must be used The ammeters and chronometers used for testing the pickup current and relay operation time must be calibrate...

Страница 489: ...econd WARNING No communication circuit shall be tested for isolation Groups to be created will depend on the type of modules included in F650 selectable according to the model The following table shows the different groups depending on the module type SOURCE 1 G1 H10 H18 G2 H13 H14 H15 SOURCE 2 G1 H1 H9 G2 H4 H5 H6 MAGNETIC MODULE G1 A5 A12 G2 B1 B12 I O F1 MIXED G1 Inp 1 F1 9 G2 Inp 2 F10 18 G3 O...

Страница 490: ...troller 10 5 10 COMMISSIONING 10 5 INDICATORS 10 10 5INDICATORS Feed the relay and verify that when commanding a LED reset operation all LED indicators light up and they are turned off when pressing the ESC key for more than 3 seconds ...

Страница 491: ...en there is no feed If the power supply source incorporates AC feed this test will be performed also for VAC If the relay incorporates a redundant power supply these tests shall be performed on both power supplies Voltage values to be applied will be the ones indicated below according to the relay model NOTE Codes HIR and LOR correspond to a redundant power supply SUPPLY V MIN V MAX HI HIR 110 250...

Страница 492: ...CATIONS Verify that available communication ports allow communication with the relay Ports to be checked are as follows Front RS232 Rear 2 x RS485 2 x Fiber Optic Serial 2 x Fiber Optic Ethernet 1 x RJ45 Ethernet A computer with EnerVista 650 Setup software and an appropriate connector must be used ...

Страница 493: ...ify that the relay measures the values with an error lower than 1 5 of the test value or 1 mA whichever is greater for sensitive ground SG GENERAL SETTINGS NAME VALUE UNITS RANGE PHASE CT RATIO 1 0 0 1 1 0 6000 0 GROUND CT RATIO 1 0 0 1 1 0 6000 0 STV GROUND CT RATIO 1 0 0 1 1 0 6000 0 PHASE VT RATIO 1 0 0 1 1 0 6000 0 PHASE VT CONNECTION WYE N A WYE DELTA NOMINAL VOLTAGE 100 V 0 1 1 2250 V NOMINA...

Страница 494: ...s to be applied for powers in a wye connection are as follows Apply the following current and voltage values With the indicated voltage and current values verify that the power measure corresponds to expected values indicated in the following table Maximum admissible error is 1 of the test value for P and Q and 0 02 for cosϕ 10 8 4 FREQUENCY Frequency measure on channel VII terminals A7 A8 Apply 5...

Страница 495: ...MEASUREMENT 10 COMMISSIONING 10 Apply 50 Vac at 50 Hz on channel Vx Maximum admissible error 10 mHz Apply 50 Vac at 60 Hz on channel Vx Maximum admissible error 12 mHz Results CHANNEL VOLTAGE V SET FREQUENCY HZ MEASURED FREQUENCY HZ VII 50 50 Hz 60 Hz VX 50 50 Hz 60 Hz ...

Страница 496: ...e same common For the first 8 inputs the voltage threshold setting is determined by Voltage Threshold A For the next 8 inputs the setting is Voltage Threshold B Inputs or contact converters CC1 CC16 must also be set to POSITIVE Test settings for mixed board type 2 8 digital inputs 4 blocks for supervision and 8 outputs The inputs test is completed by groups of 4 inputs as this type of board has 2 ...

Страница 497: ...th 52 a terminals F1 F2 and 52 b terminals F3 F4 Coil 1 circuit supervision inputs and verify that they are activated Remove voltage from both inputs and verify that it takes them 500 ms to change state deactivate Coil 2 Apply 19 Vdc to both 52 a terminals F15 F16 and 52 b terminals F17 F18 Coil 2 circuit supervision inputs and verify that they are activated Apply 19 Vdc to both 52 a terminals F15...

Страница 498: ... ELEMENTS 10 10 10CONNECTIONS FOR TESTING PROTECTION ELEMENTS Connect current sources to the relay according to the wiring diagram Current and voltage input terminals are as follows PHASE CONNECTIONS Current IA B1 B2 IB B3 B4 IC B5 B6 IG B9 B10 ISG B11 B12 Voltage VI A5 A6 VII A7 A8 VIII A9 A10 VX A11 A12 ...

Страница 499: ...eous in a time frame of 10 to 55 ms All the relay trip contacts must operate as well as the contact set as 50 Remove current and apply it again suddenly to a value of 4 times the pickup current The relay should trip instantaneously in a time frame of 10 to 45 ms Test one point for each phase and group of the protection element Note Only available for Enhanced models 50 ELEMENTS TEST PARAMETERS Ele...

Страница 500: ...o its set curve PROTECTION ELEMENT SETTINGS 51PH 51PL 51N 51G AND 46 SETTING VALUE UNIT FUNCTION ENABLED INPUT PHASOR DFT PICKUP LEVEL 1 A CURVE MODIFY FOR EACH TEST TD MULTIPLIER MODIFY FOR EACH TEST VOLTAGE RESTRAINT DISABLED ELEMENT PHASE CURVE TYPE DIAL TIMES IPICKUP TRIPPING TIMES SEC EXPECTED ADMISSIBLE 51PH IA IEEE Ext Inv 0 5 0 9 NA 1 5 11 34 11 00 11 90 5 0 648 0 600 0 710 IB IEC Curve A ...

Страница 501: ...exceeded 10 13 1 67P ELEMENT Activate only protection elements 50PH and 67P and set the relay as follows Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50PH Apply the following tests 10 13 2 67N ELEMENT Activate only protection elements 50N and 67N and set the relay as follows Configure one of the outputs to be activated only by unit 50G 67P SETTINGS 50PH SETTINGS Function ENABLED Funct...

Страница 502: ...13 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS 67P 67N 67G 67SG 10 Apply the following tests ELEMENTS PHASE UNDER TEST POLARIZATION PHASE ELEMENT TRIP CHANNEL MAGNITUDE CHANNEL MAGNITUDE MOD ARG MOD ARG 50N 67N IA 2 A 0º VI 60 V 0º NO 60 V 180º YES IB 0 A 0º VII 0 V 0º IC 0 A 0º VIII 0 V 0º ...

Страница 503: ... activated only by unit 50G Apply the following tests 67G SETTINGS 50G SETTINGS Function ENABLED Function ENABLED MTA 45 Deg Input PHASOR DFT Direction FORWARD Pickup Level 0 50 A Polarization VO Trip Delay 0 30 Block Logic PERMISSION Reset Delay 0 00 Pol V Threshold 10 V ELEMENTS PHASE UNDER TEST POLARIZATION PHASE ELEMENT TRIP CHANNE L MAGNITUDE CHANNEL MAGNITUDE MOD ARG MOD ARG 50G 67G IG 2 A 0...

Страница 504: ...ated only by unit 50SG Apply the following tests 67SG SETTINGS 50SG SETTINGS Function ENABLED Function ENABLED MTA 45 Deg Input PHASOR DFT Direction FORWARD Pickup Level 0 50 A Polarization VO Trip Delay 0 30 Block Logic PERMISSION Reset Delay 0 00 Pol V Threshold 10 V ELEMENTS PHASE UNDER TEST POLARIZATION PHASE ELEMENT TRIP CHANNEL MAGNITUDE CHANNEL MAGNITUDE MOD ARG MOD ARG 50SG 67SG ISG 2 A 0º...

Страница 505: ...e protection element being tested Set the relay as follows Apply voltage as indicated on the table over the undervoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip Decrease voltage level gradually and verify that the relay trips for the set voltage with an admissible error of 5 PHASE UV 27P Function ENABLED Mode PHASE GROUND Pickup Level 50 V Curve DEFINITE TIME Delay 2 00 sec Minimum V...

Страница 506: ... the relay as follows Apply voltage as indicated on the table under the overvoltage setting level and verify that the relay does not trip Verify that the relay trips for the set voltage with an admissible error of 5 PHSE OV 59P Function ENABLED Pickup Level 120 V Trip Delay 2 00 Reset Delay 0 00 Logic ANY PHASE ELEMENT PHASE PICKUP LEVEL VOLTS TRIP DELAY SECONDS APPLIED VOLTAGE V TRIPPING TIME S E...

Страница 507: ... with an admissible error of 5 This element can also be tested by applying only phase voltages For this purpose it is necessary to set Auxiliary Voltage VX In this condition Vn voltage is calculated as a sum of the phase voltages GENERAL SETTINGS Auxiliary Voltage VN NEUTRAL OV HIGH LOW 59NH 59NL Function ENABLED Pickup Level 120 V Trip Delay 2 00 Reset Delay 0 00 ELEMENTS INPUT PICKUP LEVEL VOLTS...

Страница 508: ...rips for the set voltage with an admissible error of 5 NOTE All angles mentioned on the tables are delay angles where a balanced ABC system would be composed by NEG SEQ OV 47 Function ENABLED Pickup Level 50 V Trip Delay 2 00 Reset Delay 0 00 CHANNEL APPLIED VOLTAGE V ANGLE TRIPPING TIME S EXPECTED ADMISSIBLE VI 65 0º NO TRIP NA VII 65 120º VIII 65 240º VI 55 0º 2 1 9 2 1 VII 55 240º VIII 55 120º ...

Страница 509: ...y trips at the set frequency in the corresponding element with an error of 3 ó 50 mHz Apply a voltage that is lower than the Minimum Voltage setting with a frequency under 81U or over 81O the setting and verify that the relay does not trip GENERAL SETTINGS Nominal Frequency 50 Hz ELEMENT SETTINGS FREQUENCY 81 81U 81O Function ENABLED ENABLED Pickup Level 47 50 Hz 52 50 Hz Trip Delay 2 00 sec 2 00 ...

Страница 510: ...lay recloses in 2 1 seconds Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 4 1 seconds Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 6 1 seconds Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the relay recloses in 8 1 seconds Command a 50PH trip and verify that the breaker opens and the recloser passes to Lockout Verify ...

Страница 511: ...is no reclose INHIBITION BY RECLOSING CONDITIONS Close the breaker and wait for 5 seconds Command a trip verify that the breaker opens and wait for the first shot Activate the inhibition input and command a new trip Verify that the breaker opens wait for 8 seconds and verify that the relay does not reclose 10 17 3 EXTERNAL RECLOSE INITIATION Close the breaker and wait for 5 seconds Activate the re...

Страница 512: ...suring the thermal element must be reset to zero in order to start the next test at a zero thermal status condition Repeat the test selecting a time constant τ1 of 60 minutes Verify that the operation time is within the range described on the following table After each measuring the thermal element must be reset to zero in order to start the next test at a zero thermal status condition RATED CURRE...

Страница 513: ...10 28 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 10 18 THERMAL IMAGE ELEMENT 49 10 COMMISSIONING 10 ...

Страница 514: ...e describes the connection between any Laptop and some F650 relay using the EnerVista 650 SETUP program For any one of these connections check first the communication parameters as follows Serial Communication RS232 or USB front port of the relay With the ESC key check on the main front screen the serial communication parameters Baud rate parity data bits stop bit and ID number Connect the serial ...

Страница 515: ...program will start connection with the relay showing the progress screen SEQUENCE ACTION SETTING ACTION IP Address OCT 1 Set to 192 Move rotating knob clockwise IP Address OCT 2 Set to 168 Move rotating knob clockwise IP Address OCT 3 Set to 37 Move rotating knob clockwise IP Address OCT 4 Set to 125 Move rotating knob clockwise Netmask OCT 2 Set to 255 Move rotating knob clockwise Netmask OCT 3 S...

Страница 516: ...AY CONFIGURATION OUTPUTS NAME VALUE Phase CT Ratio 1 0 default Ground CT Ratio 1 0 default Stv Ground CT Ratio 1 0 default Phase VT Ratio 1 0 default Phase VT Connection Wye Nominal Voltage 100 0 default Nominal Frequency 50 Phase Rotation ABC Frequency Reference VI default Auxiliary Voltage VX default NAME VALUE Function Enabled Input Phasor DFT Pickup Level 5 0 A Curve IEC Curve A TD Multiplier ...

Страница 517: ...til contact 00 on Board F operates terminals F19 F21 should be and remain closed and LED 5 should be lit Check that operating time is in the order of 1 7 seconds Remove current from terminals B1 B2 Press pushbutton F1 and check that contact 00 on Board F has been open Check that LED 5 in the front of the relay has been turned off Repeat the process for phase B terminals B3 B4 and for phase C termi...

Страница 518: ...N FUNCTION This procedure is fully described in paragraph 13 3 see Example Nº 1 Therefore it is not necessary to explain it here again except about the small modifications required for the actual exercise as well the additional settings not used until now i e recloser and synchrocheck Therefore by having the F650 set like in the previous exercise paragraph 13 the new settings and changes to be don...

Страница 519: ... Tripping and reclosing scheme Figure 11 1 Some conclusions follows The recloser cycle ends at lockout status since a permanent fault remains after two unsuccessful reclosing trials The holding time for reclosing conditions can be very low since the processor internal time to check them is instantaneously if they are present at this moment Depending in the application reclosing conditions might co...

Страница 520: ...ping action of the breaker specially in CB s with large tripping times bulk or other CB s This time delay has been set in group SETPOINT CONTROL ELEMENTS INPUTS OUTPUTS BOARD F To test the reclosing scheme one current and two voltages signals equipment with phase and frequency shifting capability must be used The current source must be switched OFF and ON in the time ranges described in the scheme...

Страница 521: ...close a F650 output contact using a front key pushbutton To reset the output contact and LED using another front key pushbutton 11 3 2 PROCEDURE Set the following values Under SETPOINT CONTROL ELEMENTS INPUTS OUTPUTS BOARD F This setting is non relevant since it applies only when pulse type is chosen Under SETPOINT RELAY CONFIGURATION OUTPUTS Under SETPOINT RELAY CONFIGURATION LEDS NAME VALUE Outp...

Страница 522: ...ate Type None Final States Frontal Key F2 Contact Input None Virtual Output None Time Out 500 default MMI Com1 Com 2 ETH Master 1 ETH Master 2 ETH Master 3 ETH Mastef 4 In the same window next rows Select Operation 1 Command Text Reset C_Output_00_00 Interlock Type None Interlocks Final State Type None Final States Frontal Key F1 Contact Input None Virtual Output None Time Out 500 default MMI Com1...

Страница 523: ...sage showing Press Enter to Confirm Key F2 will be displayed Press Enter Check that contact_00_00 board F has been closed Check that the front LED 14th is lit In the main front screen press F1 key A message showing Press Enter to Confirm Key F1 will be displayed Press Enter Check that contact_00_00 board F has been opened Check that the front LED 14th has been switched off ...

Страница 524: ... with the front serial RS232 port whereas the COM1 port is completely independent from COM2 The synchronous LAN port is COM3 Q6 Are there one or two Ethernet ports A6 The equipment has only 1 Ethernet port For redundant fiber optic versions redundancy is done at the physical level fiber optic but there is just one port Q7 How many different communication Ethernet sessions can be opened through the...

Страница 525: ... 100 it is the 50 125 or 62 5 125 multimode this last one allows longer distances Q16 What is the difference between a hub and a switch A16 In a repeater type hub shared hub one unit talks and the rest listen If all the units are talking at the same time there may be collisions in the messages what may produce certain communication delays The switch switched hub has very powerful processors and a ...

Страница 526: ...d be driven with externally generated DC current No special 48 Vdc or other outputs are included in the equipment to drive these inputs therefore contacts connected to the equipment should be connected to a DC source Q3 Is it oscillography programmable A3 Yes the sampling rate is programmable 4 8 16 32 or 64 samples per input The depth will depend on the sampling rate Q4 Do I have to select a diff...

Страница 527: ...to program the unit A4 No all main operations can easily be performed with just the incorporated HMI Handheld or laptops may be required to download large quantities of information such as oscillograms etc but they are not mandatory for a conventional user that just needs to change settings view measurements states etc Q5 Is there password security for protection and control A5 Yes there are two p...

Страница 528: ... access in the logic A1 The power supply ready contact only monitor hardware failures in the power supply to monitor the internal error of the unit it is necessary to configure a virtual output to and the assign it to the device desired contact output LED etc Q2 I set an output contact as Latched If I do not set a reset condition will it reset from the ESC key A2 No you have to configure the conta...

Страница 529: ...12 6 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB 12 4 RELAY CONFIGURATION 12 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 12 ...

Страница 530: ... configuration Verify that the general setting is set to disable and the out of service state is not active General When feeding the unit no indicator is lit up Insufficient power supply Wrong versions Fuse failure Loose fuse Incorrect wiring Verify the voltage level using a multimeter in the power supply terminals and check that it is within the model range Check relay and ENERVISTA 650 Setup ver...

Страница 531: ...Windows 2000 Disable and Enable the Ethernet connection on Control Panel inside Windows 2000 Try again 2 1 Install either Microsoft or Sun Java Virtual Machine Communication Enervista 650 Setup does not retrieve osc fault reports and Data Logger files Bad communication in TFTP using Windows 2000 Disable and Enable the Ethernet connection on Control Panel inside Windows 2000 Try again to retrieve f...

Страница 532: ...essage Os Loading and the relay will not start up Firmware The procedure can not start due to ethernet problems The Ethernet connection does not work properly Check the same as in the point above for bootware Note if the firmware upgrading procedure got stuck at this point the relay will not be upgraded After switching it off and on will continue working with the former firmware and bootware versi...

Страница 533: ...rted again during the bootware and firmware upgrade process the program will ask to confirm the IEC password Firmware Password for IEC61850 incorrect Model change Incorrect mac or serial number The password is tied to the model MAC Address and serial number any change in any of the following will need a password change If the model has been modified to add or replace any boards or communication pr...

Страница 534: ...rd BOARD H STATUS Board H status 0 Inactive There is no communication with the board 1 Active There is communication with the board BOARD J STATUS Board J status 0 Inactive There is no communication with the board 1 Active There is communication with the board IEC61850 INTERNAL STATES NON CRITICAL IEC61850 Internal States ICD STATUS UNKNOWN when the relay has not the IEC61850 proto col in the rela...

Страница 535: ...CURVE D STATUS User curve D 0 Not configured 1 Configured Green Zone Memory internal status Yellow Zone Memory internal status Orange Zone Memory internal status Red Zone Memory internal status UpTime System Time Autocheck Internal States Not available TIMER STATUS Real time clock autocheck not available GRAPHIC STATUS Graphic display status not available ALARM TEXT ARRAY Text display status not a...

Страница 536: ...ts 24 elements OPERATION BIT 1 Operation bit 001 0 the configured time expires or when success conditions are met 1 operation 1 is executed and interlocks are fulfilled OPERATION BIT 2 Operation bit 002 0 the configured time expires or when success conditions are met 1 operation 2 is executed and interlocks are fulfilled OPERATION BIT 24 Operation bit 024 0 the configured time expires or when succ...

Страница 537: ... X CONT IP_X_CC2 Input 2 CC2 in Board X CONT IP_X_CC8 Input 8 CC8 in Board X CONT IP_X_CC9 Va_COIL1 Contact Input 09 Va_COIL1 for slot X Input voltage Va detected Circuit 1 Complete circuit supervised CONT IP_X_CC10 Vb_COIL1 Contact Input 10 Vb_COIL1 for slot X Input voltage Vb detected Circuit 1 Complete circuit supervised CONT IP_X_CC11 Va_COIL2 Contact Input 11 Va_COIL2 for slot X Input voltage...

Страница 538: ...ctivation Board X CONT OP OPER_X_08 Logic signal for Output 8 activation Board X Contact Outputs Type 1 2 Board Reset signals CONT RESET_X_01 board X 01 latched output reset CONT RESET_X_02 board X 02 latched output reset CONT RESET_X_08 board X 08 latched output reset Contact Outputs Type 1 2 Board Status CONT OP_X_01 Contact output 1 Board X operation CONT OP_X_02 Contact output 2 Board X operat...

Страница 539: ...2 open SWITCH 2 CLOSED Switchgear 2 closed SWITCH 2 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 2 contact A 0 contact B 0 SWITCH 2 11_ERROR Error 11 switchgear 2 contact A 1 contact B 1 SWITCH 16 OPEN Switchgear 16 open SWITCH 16 CLOSED Switchgear 16 closed SWITCH 16 00_ERROR Error 00 switchgear 16 contact A 0 contact B 0 SWITCH 16 11_ERROR Error 11 switchgear 16 contact A 1 contact B 1 Switchgear Open Close Ini...

Страница 540: ... Reset by hardware ESC and programmable LED RESET INPUT LED 8 Programmable LED 8 status Orange colour Not latched Latching possibility via PLC Reset by hardware ESC and programmable LED RESET INPUT LED 9 Programmable LED 9 status Orange colour Not latched Latching possibility via PLC Reset by hardware ESC and programmable LED RESET INPUT LED 10 Programmable LED 10 status Orange colour Not latched ...

Страница 541: ... remote status for operations 1 Local 0 Remote Selectable through the front pushbutton Hardware and also through communications software OPERATIONS BLOCKED Operations OFF status 1 Command execution block operations blocked both in local and remote mode Selectable through the front pushbutton Hardware and also through communications software LOCAL REMOTE OFF Selection CHANGE LOCAL REMOTE Changing l...

Страница 542: ...ive OSC DIG CHANNEL 10 Oscillography Digital channel 10 1 Active 0 Not Active OSC DIG CHANNEL 11 Oscillography Digital channel 11 1 Active 0 Not Active OSC DIG CHANNEL 12 Oscillography Digital channel 12 1 Active 0 Not Active OSC DIG CHANNEL 13 Oscillography Digital channel 13 1 Active 0 Not Active OSC DIG CHANNEL 14 Oscillography Digital channel 14 1 Active 0 Not Active OSC DIG CHANNEL 15 Oscillo...

Страница 543: ... activation and deactivation of groups 2 3 GROUP 2 ACT ON Group 2 activation and deactivation of groups 1 3 GROUP 3 ACT ON Group 3 activation and deactivation of groups 1 2 Setting Groups SETT GROUPS BLOCK Group change input blocked GROUP 1 BLOCKED Settings Group 1 blocked GROUP 2 BLOCKED Settings Group 2 blocked GROUP 3 BLOCKED Settings Group 3 blocked ...

Страница 544: ...1 HIGH OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip high level Group 1 any phase PH IOC2 HIGH A BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Group 2 phase A PH IOC2 HIGH B BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Group 2 phase B PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Group 2 phase C PH IOC2 HIGH A PKP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pick...

Страница 545: ...level Group 3 phase A PH IOC3 HIGH B PKP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup high level Group 3 phase B PH IOC3 HIGH B OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip high level Group 3 phase B PH IOC3 HIGH C PKP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup high level Group 3 phase C PH IOC3 HIGH C OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip high level Group 3 ...

Страница 546: ...up low level Group 1 any phase PH IOC1 LOW OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip low level Group 1 any phase PH IOC2 LOW A BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low level Group 2 phase A PH IOC2 LOW B BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low level Group 2 phase B PH IOC2 LOW C BLK Phase instantaneous overcurrent element block Low level Group 2 phase C P...

Страница 547: ...e C PH IOC3 LOW C OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip low level Group 3 phase C PH IOC3 LOW PKP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element pickup low level Group 3 any phase PH IOC3 LOW OP Phase instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip low level Group 3 any phase Neutral IOC NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK Neutral instantaneous overcurrent element block Group 1 NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP Neutr...

Страница 548: ...rcurrent element pickup Group 3 GROUND IOC3 OP Ground instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip Group 3 Sensitive Ground IOC SENS GND IOC1 BLK Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element block Group 1 SENS GND IOC1 PKP Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element pickup Group 1 SENS GND IOC1 OP Sensitive ground instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip Group 1 SENS GND I...

Страница 549: ...eous overcurrent element operation trip Group 1 ISOLATED GND2 BLK Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element block Group 2 ISOLATED GND2 PKP Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element pickup Group 2 ISOLATED GND2 OP Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element operation trip Group 2 ISOLATED GND3 BLK Isolated ground instantaneous overcurrent element block Group 3 ISOLATED GND3 P...

Страница 550: ...Phase timed overcurrent element operation trip Group 1 any phase PH TOC2 HIGH A BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 2 phase A PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 2 phase B PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK Phase timed overcurrent element block Group 2 phase C PH TOC2 HIGH A PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2 phase A PH TOC2 HIGH A OP Phase timed overcurrent ...

Страница 551: ...l Group 1 phase C PH TOC1 LOW A PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level Group 1 phase A PH TOC1 LOW A OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation trip low level Group 1 phase A PH TOC1 LOW B PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level Group 1 phase B PH TOC1 LOW B OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation trip low level Group 1 phase B PH TOC1 LOW C PKP Phase timed overcu...

Страница 552: ... low level Group 3 phase A PH TOC3 LOW B PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level Group 3 phase B PH TOC3 LOW B OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation trip low level Group 3 phase B PH TOC3 LOW C PKP Phase timed overcurrent element pickup low level Group 3 phase C PH TOC3 LOW C OP Phase timed overcurrent element operation trip low level Group 3 phase C PH TOC3 LOW PKP Phase timed...

Страница 553: ...Group 1 SENS GND TOC2 BLOCK Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element block Group 2 SENS GND TOC2 PKP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 2 SENS GND TOC2 OP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element operation trip Group 2 SENS GND TOC3 BLOCK Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element block Group 3 SENS GND TOC3 PKP Sensitive ground timed overcurrent element pickup Group 3 SEN...

Страница 554: ...mal image phase C Group 2 element reset THERMAL2 ALARM Thermal image element alarm any phase Group 2 THERMAL2 OP Thermal image element operation any phase Group 2 THERMAL2 A ALRM Thermal image element alarm phase A Group 2 THERMAL2 A OP Thermal image element operation phase A Group 2 THERMAL2 B ALRM Thermal image element alarm phase B Group 2 THERMAL2 B OP Thermal image element operation phase B G...

Страница 555: ...nt block Group 2 Phase C PHASE DIR2 C OP Phase directional element operation Group 2 Phase C PHASE DIR3 BLK INP Phase directional block Group 3 PHASE DIR3 BLOCK A Phase directional element block Group 3 Phase A PHASE DIR3 A OP Phase directional element operation Group 3 Phase A PHASE DIR3 BLOCK B Phase directional element block Group 3 Phase B PHASE DIR3 B OP Phase directional element operation Gr...

Страница 556: ...p 1 SENS GND DIR2 BLK IP Sensitive ground directional element block input Group 2 SENS GND DIR2 BLOCK Sensitive Ground directional element block Group 2 SENS GND DIR2 OP Sensitive Ground directional element operation Group 2 SENS GND DIR3 BLK IP Sensitive ground directional element block input Group 3 SENS GND DIR3 BLOCK Sensitive Ground directional element block Group 3 SENS GND DIR3 OP Sensitive...

Страница 557: ...ment operation BC Group 2 PHASE UV2 CA PKP Undervoltage element pickup CA Group 2 PHASE UV2 CA OP Undervoltage element operation CA Group 2 PHASE UV2 PKP Pickup of any of the above mentioned elements PHASE UV2 OP Operation of any of the above mentioned elements PHASE UV3 BLOCK Phase undervoltage element block Group 3 PHASE UV3 A PKP Undervoltage element pickup AG Group 3 PHASE UV3 A OP Undervoltag...

Страница 558: ...element pickup AB Group 2 PHASE OV2 AB OP Overvoltage element operation AB Group 2 PHASE OV2 BC PKP Overvoltage element pickup BC Group 2 PHASE OV2 BC OP Overvoltage element operation BC Group 2 PHASE OV2 CA PKP Overvoltage element pickup CA Group 2 PHASE OV2 CA OP Overvoltage element operation CA Group 2 PHASE OV2 PKP Pickup of any of the above mentioned elements PHASE OV2 OP Operation of any of ...

Страница 559: ...tage element pickup low level Group 1 NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP Neutral overvoltage element operation low level Group 1 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW BLK Neutral overvoltage element block low level Group 2 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW PKP Neutral overvoltage element pickup low level Group 2 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP Neutral overvoltage element operation low level Group 2 NEUTRAL OV3 LOW BLK Neutral overvoltage element block low level Gro...

Страница 560: ...P Negative sequence overvoltage element pickup Group 1 NEG SEQ OV1 OP Negative sequence overvoltage element operation Group 1 NEG SEQ OV2 BLOCK Negative sequence overvoltage element block Group 2 NEG SEQ OV2 PKP Negative sequence overvoltage element pickup Group 2 NEG SEQ OV2 OP Negative sequence overvoltage element operation Group 2 NEG SEQ OV3 BLOCK Negative sequence overvoltage element block Gr...

Страница 561: ... FREQ RATE1 OP Frequency rate of change element operation Group 1 FREQ RATE2 BLOCK Frequency rate of change element block Group 2 FREQ RATE2 PKP Frequency rate of change element pickup Group 2 FREQ RATE2 OP Frequency rate of change element operation Group 2 FREQ RATE3 BLOCK Frequency rate of change element block Group 3 FREQ RATE3 PKP Frequency rate of change element pickup Group 3 FREQ RATE3 OP F...

Страница 562: ... 1 Group 3 FWD PWR3 STG1 OP Forward Power element operation level 1 Group 3 FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP Forward Power element pickup level 2 Group 3 FWD PWR3 STG2 OP Forward Power element operation level 2 Group 3 KI2t PHASE A ALARM K I2t phase A Alarm KI2t PHASE B ALARM K I2t phase B Alarm KI2t PHASE C ALARM K I2t phase C Alarm Breaker Maintenance BKR OPENINGS ALARM Maximum Breaker openings alarm BKR OPEN ...

Страница 563: ...E UNBLOCK Recloser element unblock by pulse AR INITIATE Reclose initiate AR CONDS INPUT Reclose permission condition in input to Function 1 there are conditions AR CLOSE BREAKER Closing permission for the recloser AR OUT OF SERVICE Recloser out of service AR READY Recloser READY AR LOCKOUT Recloser in LOCKOUT AR BLOCK Recloser BLOCKed AR RCL IN PROGRESS Recloser Cycle in progress AR LCK BY ANOMALY...

Страница 564: ...onal Power element pickup level 2 Group 2 DIR PWR2 STG2 OP Directional Power element operation level 2 Group 2 DIR PWR2 STG PKP Directional power element pickup Group 2 DIR PWR2 STG OP Directional Power element operation Group 2 DIR PWR3 BLOCK Directional power element block Group 3 DIR PWR3 STG1 PKP Directional Power element pickup level 1 Group 3 DIR PWR3 STG1 OP Directional Power element operat...

Страница 565: ...omparators Analog Level 01 Analog comparator element level Group 1 Analog Level 02 Analog comparator element level Group 2 Analog Level 20 Analog comparator element level Group 20 Load Encroachment LOAD ENCR1 BLK Load Encroachment element block Group 1 LOAD ENCR1 PKP Load Encroachment element pickup Group 1 LOAD ENCR1 OP Load Encroachment element operation Group 1 LOAD ENCR2 BLK Load Encroachment ...

Страница 566: ... current voltage and power High Level Group 2 32N2 HIGH OC PKP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Overcurrent Pickup High Level Group 2 32N2 HIGH OP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Operation High Level Group 2 32N3 HIGH BLOCK wattmetric Ground Fault Element Block High Level Group 3 32N3 HIGH PKP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Global Pickup current voltage and power High Level Group 3 32N3 HIGH OC PK...

Страница 567: ...ckup current voltage and power Low Level Group 2 32N2 LOW OC PKP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Overcurrent Pickup Low Level Group 2 32N2 LOW OP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Operation Low Level Group 2 32N3 LOW BLOCK wattmetric Ground Fault Element Block Low Level Group 3 32N3 LOW PKP wattmetric Ground Fault Element Global Pickup current voltage and power Low Level Group 3 32N3 LOW OC PKP watt...

Страница 568: ...utput on Remote Output GOOSE 2 Operation GOOSE Rem GOOSE Dig Out 32 1 output on Remote Output GOOSE 32 Operation GOOSE Remote Inputs Remote Input 1 Flag is set logic 1 Remote Input 2 Flag is set logic 1 Remote Input 32 Flag is set logic 1 Remote Devices Remote Device 1 Flag is set logic 1 Remote Device 2 Flag is set logic 1 Remote Device 16 Flag is set logic 1 GOOSE DIG INPUTS Rem GOOSE Dig Input ...

Страница 569: ...A 36 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB A 1 LOGIC OPERANDS APPENDIX A A ...

Страница 570: ...these items This descriptions includes the data type length memory position object version etc Moreover the database will group the different objects by subgroups such as status and settings groups Each object has a unique memory position for the whole family Only after reading the objects of a particular relay it will be possible to elaborate its map This map will only be valid for that particula...

Страница 571: ... two rear RS485 or fiber optic ports and a 10 100Base T port and in some configurations two 100BaseFX ports The data flow in any of the configurations is half duplex Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous way and it is formed by 1 start bit 8 data bits 1 stop bit and 1 parity bit if programmed Thus you have a 10 or 11 bit data depending on whether it has parity or not The port baud rate ...

Страница 572: ...but none of them will respond to the master Broadcast is only accepted for writing because it is nonsense to perform a reading request in Broadcast as no unit will respond to it FUNCTION CODE B 1 byte This is one of the function codes supported by the equipment In this case the only supported function codes will be 3 and 4 for reading and 16 for writing When the slave has to respond with an except...

Страница 573: ...GEK 106310AB B 2 MODBUS F650 APPENDIX B B B 2 4 GENERIC READING MASTER SERVER Request A B C D 01 03 0B 37 00 03 XX XX Data addr Regs OK Response A B C D 01 03 06 02 2B 00 00 00 64 XX XX Bytes Data Error Response A B C D 01 83 07 XX XX ...

Страница 574: ...5 APPENDIX B B 2 MODBUS F650 B B 2 5 GENERIC WRITING MASTER SERVER Request A B C D 01 10 00 87 00 02 04 00 0A 01 02 XX XX Data addr Regs Bytes Data OK Response A B C D 01 10 00 87 00 02 XX XX Data addr Regs Error Response A B C D 01 90 07 XX XX ...

Страница 575: ...riting This function allows writing 1 or more registers representing one or more settings Registers are 2 byte long values transmitted with the most important byte first The maximum number of registers to be written in a single package is 125 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION The slave does not support any function with the received function code in this message 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS Master is trying to perfo...

Страница 576: ...sign Example 1230x007B F5 2 Integer without 4 bytes sign Example 123120x00003018 F6 4 8 bytes Float Example 123 3240x405ED4BC6A7EF9DB F7 1 Characters without sign As it needs to be sent in a register i e in two bytes the character will go below Example β x00E1 F8 1 Characters with sign As it needs to be sent in a register i e in two bytes the character will go below Example A x0041 F9 16 String Ch...

Страница 577: ...t write a register in the last position of the group this is called CONFIRMATION by some protocols For safety reasons there is certain limitation when CONFIRMING settings GROUPS the time period from the last settings writing to CONFIRMATION cannot exceed 15 seconds B 4 3 SNAPSHOT EVENTS Nowadays event retrieval is completely compatible with UR family In the F650 the NEW EVENTS concept has been ext...

Страница 578: ...t there is only one format type with code 0 Its structure is as follows UINT16 event handle 8 bytes event date and time 29 bytes event cause string finished in null UINT32 Phasor Ia scaled to 1000 UINT32 Phasor Ib scaled to 1000 UINT32 Phasor Ic scaled to 1000 UINT32 Line Frequency scaled to 1000 UINT32 Phasor Ig scaled to 1000 UINT32 Phasor Isg scaled to 1000 UINT32 Zero seq I0 scaled to 1000 UIN...

Страница 579: ...72 0x20 0x56 0x61 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56 0x62 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x68 0x61 0x73 0x6F 0x72 0x20 0x56 0x63 0x6E 0x2C 0x50 0x6F 0x73 0x69 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x31 0x2C 0x4E 0x65 0x67 0x61 0x74 0x69 0x76 0x65 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x32 0x2C 0x5A 0x65 0x72 0x6F 0x20 0x53 0x65 0x71 0x20 0x56 0x30 0x2C 0x33 0x20 0x50 0x68 0x4C 0xF3 0xFE 0x03 0x...

Страница 580: ... 0x32 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x2C 0x30 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x31 0x2E 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x0D 0x0A CR LF a line ends 0x00 0x00 0x30 0x0D 0x0A 0x45 0x56 0x45 0x4E 0x54 0x5F 0x46 0x36 0x35 0x30 0x5F 0x56 0x30 0x30 0x2C 0x33 0x30 0x39 0x38 0x2C 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x30 0x31 0x36 0x65 0x62 0x61 0x33 0x33 0x62 0x62 0x38 0x2C 0x43 0x6F 0x6E 0x74 0x61 0x63 0x74 0...

Страница 581: ...afff Operation 24 bit 7 0xafff The register format is MOTOROLA this means that the first byte arriving is the one with more weight Remember that depending on where it communicates the correspondent channel will be activated which takes part for PLC operations if the operation is successful or not The operations channels are 0 MMI 1 OPER REMOTE 2 COM 1 COMMUNICATION 3 COM 2 COMMUNICATION 4 RED 1 CO...

Страница 582: ...e board number 0 or 1 and the restraint ones are the bytes of bits bits are grouped byte to byte 3º CLOSE FILE OF OUTPUTS writing msg to 0xFE 28 of 3 registers with the name OUTPUT Example activate the two lower relays to board 0 1st Opening 0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x20 0x00 0x03 0x06 0x4F 0x55 0x54 0x50 0x55 0x54 0xA8 0x42 RELAY O U T P U T PC 0xFE 0x10 0xFE 0x20 0x00 0x03 0xA4 0x25 2nd Writing 0xFE 0x10 ...

Страница 583: ... Error 11 52A 52B ON Internally the events buffer is a circular FIFO of 255 events The addresses for managing this FIFO are 0x03FF Number of the following event To know whether there are new events 0xFCFF Access from the oldest event 0xFD00 to 0xFDFF Access to any of the events circular queue In the 0x03FF address it is stored the event number of the following new event that it is going to be gene...

Страница 584: ...se addresses consist of 14 bytes each one instead of the 2 used in ModBus This way each event which has a structure of 14 bytes will be contained in one address as shown on the table below Imagine that the events buffer contains the following information 105 registers 15 events 7 registers NOTE the 0x03FF address will have the event number 7677 because the 7676 is the last one a EVENTS COLLECTION ...

Страница 585: ...ress and then arrange by event number From that moment only the new ones must be requested NEW EVENTS In the 0x03FF address there is the number of the following event that is going to be written therefore it is possible to know how many events must be read from the last time that the relay was asked If the relay indicated that the new event to be generated is the 7677 NOTE the 0x03FF address will ...

Страница 586: ...ta 650 Setup form the command line offers the possibility of transferring control events to a file For this purpose we need to indicate the event number from which event controls are to be retrieved and the file where they are to be stored Communication can be established via serial communication by specifying the port and access baudrate or via Ethernet through the IP address and communication po...

Страница 587: ...256 non consecutive data records settings and statuses It is often required for a master computer to interrogate continuously several connected slave relays If those values are dispersed along the memory map reading them may require several transmissions and this may cause a communications overload The User Map can be programmed to get several memory addresses together in a block of consecutive ad...

Страница 588: ...a type very particular because it is made up of other simples Once the data is changed varies with time it is a changing setting that can be read It shares the time change with the IRIGB this has more priority and with a possible modification from MMI or another protocols In case of the relay gets disconnected from its auxiliary power supply during some days the time will remain in a chip feed by ...

Страница 589: ...ntion must be paid to setting confirmation writings especially with reference to time out EnerVista 650 Setup software is recommended to do the configuration modifications as this software takes into account all these details B 6 10 TRACES AND TROUBLESHOOTING The tracer is a debugging tool to view the strings in any writing or reading process in ModBus This tracer is activated in the menu from Ene...

Страница 590: ...1 0X81 0X40 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X0 0Xc1 0X81 0X40 0X1 0Xc0 0X80 0X41 0X0 0Xc1...

Страница 591: ...6 0Xa7 0X67 0Xa5 0X65 0X64 0Xa4 0X6c 0Xac 0Xad 0X6d 0Xaf 0X6f 0X6e 0Xae 0Xaa 0X6a 0X6b 0Xab 0X69 0Xa9 0Xa8 0X68 0X78 0Xb8 0Xb9 0X79 0Xbb 0X7b 0X7a 0Xba 0Xbe 0X7e 0X7f 0Xbf 0X7d 0Xbd 0Xbc 0X7c 0Xb4 0X74 0X75 0Xb5 0X77 0Xb7 0Xb6 0X76 0X72 0Xb2 0Xb3 0X73 0Xb1 0X71 0X70 0Xb0 0X50 0X90 0X91 0X51 0X93 0X53 0X52 0X92 0X96 0X56 0X57 0X97 0X55 0X95 0X94 0X54 0X9c 0X5c 0X5d 0X9d 0X5f 0X9f 0X9e 0X5e 0X5a 0X9...

Страница 592: ...ire UCHAR fn 3 o 4 USHORT mem USHORT off USHORT check PET_READ static PET_READ vpet_read this is the message of reading And now it is proceed to perform the reading message check USHORT xx xx vpet_read check if fn_035c_cr16 UCHAR vpet_read sizeof PET_READ 2 xx OK else ko If it is INTEL everything works but bytes are interchanged ...

Страница 593: ...0400 V O Latched 1 F001 R 1 0x0045 0x1000 V O Latched 3 F001 R 1 0x0046 0x0200 V O Latched 16 F001 R 1 Reset Salidas Virtuales Latcheadas Reset Latched virtual outputs 0x0046 0x0400 Reset V O Latched F001 R 1 Entradas Virtuales con sellado 32 elementos Virtual Input Latched 0x0083 0x0400 LATCHED VIRT IP 1 F001 R 1 0x0083 0x0800 LATCHED VIRT IP 2 F001 R 1 0x0085 0x0200 LATCHED VIRT IP 32 F001 R 1 E...

Страница 594: ...salidas Tarjeta G 16 elementos Board G Contact Output Operate logical status 0x00AE 0x2000 CONT OP OPER_G_01 F001 R 1 0x00AE 0x4000 CONT OP OPER_G_02 F001 R 1 0x00AF 0x1000 CONT OP OPER_G_16 F001 R 1 Estado Señales Reposición de Salidas Tarjeta G 16 elementos Board G Contact Output Resets 0x00AF 0x2000 CONT OP RESET_G_01 F001 R 1 0x00AF 0x4000 CONT OP RESET_G_02 F001 R 1 0x00B0 0x1000 CONT OP RESE...

Страница 595: ...ey F001 R 1 0x00D2 0x0008 LOCAL OPERATION MODE F001 R 1 0x00D2 0x0010 OPERATIONS BLOCKED F001 R 1 Estados Internos Internal States 0x00D2 0x0020 DSP COMM ERROR F001 R 1 0x00D2 0x0040 MAGNETIC MODULE ERROR F001 R 1 Entrada Reset Leds configurable Led reset Input 0x00D2 0x0080 LED RESET INPUT F001 R 1 Entradas Cambio Estado Local Remoto OFF configurable Local Remote Off Input selection 0x00D3 0x0100...

Страница 596: ...00FE 0x2000 PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x4000 PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x8000 PH IOC3 HIGH C BLK F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x0001 PH IOC3 HIGH A PKP F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x0002 PH IOC3 HIGH A OP F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x0004 PH IOC3 HIGH B PKP F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x0008 PH IOC3 HIGH B OP F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x0010 PH IOC3 HIGH C PKP F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x0020 PH IOC3 HIGH C OP F001 R 1 0x00FE 0x0040 PH IOC3 HIGH ...

Страница 597: ... PH IOC2 LOW OP F001 R 1 0x010F 0x4000 PH IOC3 LOW A BLK F001 R 1 0x010F 0x8000 PH IOC3 LOW B BLK F001 R 1 0x010F 0x0001 PH IOC3 LOW C BLK F001 R 1 0x010F 0x0002 PH IOC3 LOW A PKP F001 R 1 0x010F 0x0004 PH IOC3 LOW A OP F001 R 1 0x010F 0x0008 PH IOC3 LOW B PKP F001 R 1 0x010F 0x0010 PH IOC3 LOW B OP F001 R 1 0x010F 0x0020 PH IOC3 LOW C PKP F001 R 1 0x010F 0x0040 PH IOC3 LOW C OP F001 R 1 0x010F 0x...

Страница 598: ... 0x0134 0x2000 SENS GND IOC1 OP F001 R 1 0x0139 0x4000 SENS GND IOC2 BLK F001 R 1 0x0139 0x8000 SENS GND IOC2 PKP F001 R 1 0x0139 0x0001 SENS GND IOC2 OP F001 R 1 0x013E 0x0002 SENS GND IOC3 BLK F001 R 1 0x013E 0x0004 SENS GND IOC3 PKP F001 R 1 0x013E 0x0008 SENS GND IOC3 OP F001 R 1 Estados Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Phase TOC High States 0x0143 0x0010 PH TOC1 HIGH A BLK F001...

Страница 599: ...1 Estados Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra Ground TOC States 0x0164 0x4000 GROUND TOC1 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0164 0x8000 GROUND TOC1 PKP F001 R 1 0x0164 0x0001 GROUND TOC1 OP F001 R 1 0x0169 0x0002 GROUND TOC2 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0169 0x0004 GROUND TOC2 PKP F001 R 1 0x0169 0x0008 GROUND TOC2 OP F001 R 1 0x016E 0x0010 GROUND TOC3 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x016E 0x0020 GROUND TOC3 PKP F001 R 1 0x016E 0x0040 GROU...

Страница 600: ...HASE UV2 PKP F001 R 1 0x018A 0x2000 PHASE UV2 OP F001 R 1 0x018F 0x4000 PHASE UV3 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x018F 0x8000 PHASE UV3 A PKP F001 R 1 0x018F 0x0001 PHASE UV3 A OP F001 R 1 0x018F 0x0002 PHASE UV3 B PKP F001 R 1 0x018F 0x0004 PHASE UV3 B OP F001 R 1 0x018F 0x0008 PHASE UV3 C PKP F001 R 1 0x018F 0x0010 PHASE UV3 C OP F001 R 1 0x018F 0x0020 PHASE UV3 AB PKP F001 R 1 0x018F 0x0040 PHASE UV3 AB OP F0...

Страница 601: ...01 R 1 0x01AB 0x2000 THERMAL2 C OP F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x4000 THERMAL3 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x8000 THERMAL3 A RST F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x0001 THERMAL3 B RST F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x0002 THERMAL3 C RST F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x0004 THERMAL3 ALARM F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x0008 THERMAL3 OP F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x0010 THERMAL3 A ALRM F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x0020 THERMAL3 A OP F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x0040 THERMAL3 B ALRM F001 R 1 0x01B0 0x0080 TH...

Страница 602: ... 0x01D6 0x0400 GROUND DIR1 OP F001 R 1 0x01DB 0x0800 GROUND DIR2 BLK INP F001 R 1 0x01DB 0x1000 GROUND DIR2 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x01DB 0x2000 GROUND DIR2 OP F001 R 1 0x01E0 0x4000 GROUND DIR3 BLK INP F001 R 1 0x01E0 0x8000 GROUND DIR3 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x01E0 0x0001 GROUND DIR3 OP F001 R 1 Estados Fallo de Interruptor Breaker Failure States 0x01E5 0x0002 BKR FAIL INITIATE F001 R 1 0x01E5 0x0004 BKR FAIL N...

Страница 603: ...AR BLK AFTER 3 SHOT F001 R 1 0x01F7 0x0200 AR BLK AFTER 4 SHOT F001 R 1 0x01F7 0x0400 AR BLOCK BY LEVEL F001 R 1 0x01F7 0x0800 AR BLOCK BY PULSE F001 R 1 Estados Sobretensión de Neutro Nivel Alto Neutral OV High States 0x01FC 0x1000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH BLK F001 R 1 0x01FC 0x2000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH PKP F001 R 1 0x01FC 0x4000 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP F001 R 1 0x0201 0x8000 NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH BLK F001 R 1 0x0201...

Страница 604: ...230 0x0002 PHASE OV2 AB PKP F001 R 1 0x0230 0x0004 PHASE OV2 AB OP F001 R 1 0x0230 0x0008 PHASE OV2 BC PKP F001 R 1 0x0230 0x0010 PHASE OV2 BC OP F001 R 1 0x0230 0x0020 PHASE OV2 CA PKP F001 R 1 0x0230 0x0040 PHASE OV2 CA OP F001 R 1 0x0230 0x0080 PHASE OV2 PKP F001 R 1 0x0231 0x0100 PHASE OV2 OP F001 R 1 0x0236 0x0200 PHASE OV3 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0236 0x0400 PHASE OV3 AB PKP F001 R 1 0x0236 0x0800 ...

Страница 605: ...RFREQ1 PKP F001 R 1 0x026A 0x8000 UNDERFREQ1 OP F001 R 1 0x026F 0x0001 UNDERFREQ2 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x026F 0x0002 UNDERFREQ2 PKP F001 R 1 0x026F 0x0004 UNDERFREQ2 OP F001 R 1 0x0274 0x0008 UNDERFREQ3 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0274 0x0010 UNDERFREQ3 PKP F001 R 1 0x0274 0x0020 UNDERFREQ3 OP F001 R 1 Estados Calibración Calibration States 0x0279 0x0040 FACTORY CALIBRATION F001 R 1 0x0279 0x0080 CALIBRATION ERROR...

Страница 606: ... BROKEN CONDUCT3 PKP F001 R 1 0x029F 0x0400 BROKEN CONDUCT3 OP F001 R 1 Estados Energía Energy States 0x02A4 0x0800 FREEZE ENERGY CNT F001 R 1 0x02A4 0x1000 UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT F001 R 1 0x02A4 0x2000 RESET ENERGY CNT F001 R 1 Estados Unidad de Tierra Aislada Isolated Ground States 0x02B8 0x4000 ISOLATED GND1 BLK F001 R 1 0x02B8 0x8000 ISOLATED GND1 PKP F001 R 1 0x02B8 0x0001 ISOLATED GND1 OP F001 ...

Страница 607: ...WD PWR3 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0300 0x0800 FWD PWR3 STG1 PKP F001 R 1 0x0300 0x1000 FWD PWR3 STG1 OP F001 R 1 0x0300 0x2000 FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP F001 R 1 0x0300 0x4000 FWD PWR3 STG2 OP F001 R 1 Entradas Demanda Demand Inputs 0x0305 0x8000 DEMAND TRIGGER INP F001 R 1 0x0305 0x0001 DEMAND RESET INP F001 R 1 Estado Entradas Tarjeta H 32 elementos Board H Contact Input States 0x0319 0x0002 CONT IP_H_CC1 F001 R...

Страница 608: ...Contact Output Resets 0x0341 0x0004 CONT OP RESET_J_01 F001 R 1 0x0341 0x0008 CONT OP RESET_J_02 F001 R 1 0x0342 0x0002 CONT OP RESET_J_16 F001 R 1 Estado Salidas Tarjeta J 16 elementos Board J Contact Outputs physical states 0x0342 0x0004 CONT OP_J_01 F001 R 1 0x0342 0x0008 CONT OP_J_02 F001 R 1 0x0343 0x0002 CONT OP_J_16 F001 R 1 Estado Tarjeta J Board J Status 0x0343 0x0004 BOARD J STATUS F001 ...

Страница 609: ... PH TOC3 LOW C PKP F001 R 1 0x036F 0x0002 PH TOC3 LOW C OP F001 R 1 0x036F 0x0004 PH TOC3 LOW PKP F001 R 1 0x036F 0x0008 PH TOC3 LOW OP F001 R 1 Estados Contactos Configuración Aparamenta 16 elementos Switchgear Contact Configuration States 0x0374 0x0010 SWITCH 1 A INPUT F001 R 1 0x0374 0x0020 SWITCH 1 B INPUT F001 R 1 0x0374 0x0040 SWITCH 2 A INPUT F001 R 1 0x0374 0x0080 SWITCH 2 B INPUT F001 R 1...

Страница 610: ...SE INIT F001 R 1 Estados Fallo Apertura y Cierre Aparamenta Switchgear Fail States 0x037E 0x0010 SWGR 1 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1 0x037E 0x0020 SWGR 2 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1 0x037F 0x0008 SWGR 16 FAIL TO OPEN F001 R 1 0x037F 0x0010 SWGR 1 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1 0x037F 0x0020 SWGR 2 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1 0x0380 0x0008 SWGR 16 FAIL TO CLOSE F001 R 1 Estados Interruptor Breaker States 0x0390 0x0010 KI2t ...

Страница 611: ...G1 PKP F001 R 1 0x03BD 0x8000 DIR PWR3 STG1 OP F001 R 1 0x03BD 0x0001 DIR PWR3 STG2 PKP F001 R 1 0x03BD 0x0002 DIR PWR3 STG2 OP F001 R 1 0x03BD 0x0004 DIR PWR3 STG PKP F001 R 1 0x03BD 0x0008 DIR PWR3 STG OP F001 R 1 Estados Unidad de Rotor Bloqueado Locked Rotor 48 0x03C2 0x0010 LOCKED ROTOR1 BLK F001 R 1 0x03C2 0x0020 LOCKED ROTOR1 PKP F001 R 1 0x03C2 0x0040 LOCKED ROTOR1 OP F001 R 1 0x03C3 0x008...

Страница 612: ...Level 03 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x0100 Analog Level 04 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x0200 Analog Level 05 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x0400 Analog Level 06 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x0800 Analog Level 07 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x1000 Analog Level 08 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x2000 Analog Level 09 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x4000 Analog Level 10 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x8000 Analog Level 11 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x0001 Analog Level 12 F001 R 1 0x03F9 0x0002 Analog Level 13 F...

Страница 613: ...0x0800 LOAD ENCR1 PKP F001 R 1 0x040C 0x1000 LOAD ENCR1 OP F001 R 1 0x0411 0x2000 LOAD ENCR2 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0411 0x4000 LOAD ENCR2 PKP F001 R 1 0x0411 0x8000 LOAD ENCR2 OP F001 R 1 0x0416 0x0001 LOAD ENCR3 BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0416 0x0002 LOAD ENCR3 PKP F001 R 1 0x0416 0x0002 LOAD ENCR3 PKP F001 R 1 0x0416 0x0004 LOAD ENCR3 OP F001 R 1 Entradas digitales GOOSE Rem GOOSE digital Inputs 0x0421 0x2000 ...

Страница 614: ...t 2 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x8000 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 3 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x0001 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 4 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x0002 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 5 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x0004 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 6 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x0008 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 7 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x0010 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 8 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x0020 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 9 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x0040 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 10 F001 R 1 0x0423 0x0080 Rem GOOSE Dig Out 11 F001 R ...

Страница 615: ...10 32N1 LOW PKP F001 R 1 0x0454 0x0020 32N1 LOW OC PKP F001 R 1 0x0454 0x0040 32N1 LOW OP F001 R 1 0x0455 0x0080 32N2 LOW BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0456 0x0100 32N2 LOW PKP F001 R 1 0x0456 0x0200 32N2 LOW OC PKP F001 R 1 0x0456 0x0400 32N2 LOW OP F001 R 1 0x0457 0x0800 32N3 LOW BLOCK F001 R 1 0x0457 0x1000 32N3 LOW PKP F001 R 1 0x0457 0x2000 32N3 LOW OC PKP F001 R 1 0x0457 0x4000 32N3 LOW OP F001 R 1 Entra...

Страница 616: ...hasor Vab F002 1000 R 2 0x0C42 Vab Real F002 1000 R 2 0x0C44 Vab Imag F002 1000 R 2 0x0C46 Phasor Vbc F002 1000 R 2 0x0C48 Vbc Real F002 1000 R 2 0x0C4A Vbc Imag F002 1000 R 2 0x0C4C Phasor Vca F002 1000 R 2 0x0C4E Vca Real F002 1000 R 2 0x0C50 Vca Imag F002 1000 R 2 0x0C52 Phasor Van F002 1000 R 2 0x0C54 Va Real F002 1000 R 2 0x0C56 Va Imag F002 1000 R 2 0x0C58 Phasor Vbn F002 1000 R 2 0x0C5A Vb ...

Страница 617: ...000 R 2 0x0CA4 Phase C Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2 0x0CA6 3 Phase Apparent Pwr F002 1000 R 2 0x0CA8 3 Phase Real Pwr F002 1000 R 2 0x0CAA 3 Phase Reactive Pwr F002 1000 R 2 0x0CAC Phase A Power Factor F002 1000 R 2 0x0CAE Phase B Power Factor F002 1000 R 2 0x0CB0 Phase C Power Factor F002 1000 R 2 0x0CB2 3 Phase Power Factor F002 1000 R 2 Ratios corriente y tensión Current and Voltage Ratios 0x0CB4...

Страница 618: ...ón para la función de sincronismo Voltage Difference for synchrocheck unit 0x0E31 VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE F002 1000 0 R 2 Diferencia de Frecuencia para la función de sincronismo Frequency Difference for synchrocheck unit 0x0E33 FREQ DIFFERENCE F002 1000 0 R 2 Estados Reenganchador Enumerado Autorecloser Status 0x0E36 AR STATUS F012 R 1 0 OUT OF SERVICE 1 READY 2 LOCKOUT 3 BLOCK 4 RECLOSE IN PROGRESS 0x...

Страница 619: ...0 R 2 0x0EF4 RMS Ig Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0EF6 RMS Isg Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0EF8 I0 Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0EFA I1 Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0EFC I2 Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0EFE V0 Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0F00 V1 Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0F02 V2 Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0F04 Vab Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0F06 Vbc Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0F08 Vca Primary F002 1000 R 2 0x0F0A Va Primary F002 1000 R ...

Страница 620: ...1000 R 2 0x0F4A Neg MVarhour Cnt F002 1000 R 2 0x0F4C of Load To Trip F002 1000 R 2 Medidas Demanda Demand measures 0x0FAB DEMAND IA F002 1000 R 2 0x0FAD DEMAND IA MAX F002 1000 R 2 0x0FAF DEMAND IA DATE F011 R 3 0x0FB2 DEMAND IB F002 1000 R 2 0x0FB4 DEMAND IB MAX F002 1000 R 2 0x0FB6 DEMAND IB DATE F011 R 3 0x0FB9 DEMAND IC F002 1000 R 2 0x0FBB DEMAND IC MAX F002 1000 R 2 0x0FBD DEMAND IC DATE F0...

Страница 621: ...CLOSE TIMING F003 1 R 2 Registrador de Datos Data Logger 0x1153 OLDEST SAMPLE TIME F011 R 3 0x1156 NEWEST SAMPLE TIME F011 R 3 0x1159 DATA LOGGER CHANNELS F004 1 R 1 0x115A DATA LOGGER DAYS F003 1 R 2 Estados Internos Sistema Internal System States 0x1160 Kswapd Time F005 1 R 2 0x1162 mtd2 Time F005 1 R 2 0x1164 mtd3 Time F005 1 R 2 0x1166 CPU Rtai F005 1 R 2 0x1168 CPU Linux F005 1 R 2 0x116A Tot...

Страница 622: ...1235 PulseCntr Freeze 6 F002 1000 000 R 2 0x1237 PulseCntr Freeze 7 F002 1000 000 R 2 0x1239 PulseCntr Freeze 8 F002 1000 000 R 2 Entradas analógicas remotas tipo float Float Remote Analog Input 0x126D Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 1 F003 1000 R 2 0x126F Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 2 F003 1000 R 2 0x1271 Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 3 F003 1000 R 2 0x1273 Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 4 F003 1000 R 2 0x1275 Rem Ana Inp FLOAT 5 F003 1000 R 2 ...

Страница 623: ...001 Phase TOC1 High F001 R 1 0x23C2 0x0001 Phase TOC2 High F001 R 1 0x23DF 0x0001 Phase TOC3 High F001 R 1 0x23FC 0x0001 Neutral TOC1 F001 R 1 0x2417 0x0001 Neutral TOC2 F001 R 1 0x2432 0x0001 Neutral TOC3 F001 R 1 0x244D 0x0001 Ground TOC1 F001 R 1 0x2469 0x0001 Ground TOC2 F001 R 1 0x2485 0x0001 Ground TOC3 F001 R 1 0x24A1 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC1 F001 R 1 0x24BD 0x0001 Sensitive Ground TOC2...

Страница 624: ...001 Overfrequency2 F001 R 1 0x29AC 0x0001 Overfrequency3 F001 R 1 0x29C9 0x0001 Underfrequency1 F001 R 1 0x29E6 0x0001 Underfrequency2 F001 R 1 0x2A03 0x0001 Underfrequency3 F001 R 1 0x2A7C 0x0001 Oscillography F001 R 1 0x2A93 0x0001 Fault Report F001 R 1 0x2C08 0x0001 Broken Conductor1 F001 R 1 0x2C21 0x0001 Broken Conductor2 F001 R 1 0x2C3A 0x0001 Broken Conductor3 F001 R 1 0x2DF6 0x0001 Isolate...

Страница 625: ...3 Low Event F001 R 1 0x22B3 0x0001 Neutral IOC1 Event F001 R 1 0x22CE 0x0001 Neutral IOC2 Event F001 R 1 0x22E9 0x0001 Neutral IOC3 Event F001 R 1 0x2305 0x0001 Ground IOC1 Event F001 R 1 0x2321 0x0001 Ground IOC2 Event F001 R 1 0x233D 0x0001 Ground IOC3 Event F001 R 1 0x2359 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC1 Event F001 R 1 0x2375 0x0001 Sensitive Ground IOC2 Event F001 R 1 0x2391 0x0001 Sensitive Grou...

Страница 626: ...R 1 0x2868 0x0001 Auxiliary UV3 Event F001 R 1 0x2884 0x0001 Phase OV1 Event F001 R 1 0x28A0 0x0001 Phase OV2 Event F001 R 1 0x28BC 0x0001 Phase OV3 Event F001 R 1 0x28D7 0x0001 Auxiliary OV1 Event F001 R 1 0x28F2 0x0001 Auxiliary OV2 Event F001 R 1 0x290D 0x0001 Auxiliary OV3 Event F001 R 1 0x2928 0x0001 Negative Sequence TOC1 Event F001 R 1 0x2943 0x0001 Negative Sequence TOC2 Event F001 R 1 0x2...

Страница 627: ...Switchgear15 Event F001 R 1 0x333B 0x0001 Switchgear16 Event F001 R 1 0x3354 0x0001 Breaker Settings Event F001 R 1 0x3909 0x0001 Directional Power1 Event F001 R 1 0x392C 0x0001 Directional Power2 Event F001 R 1 0x394F 0x0001 Directional Power3 Event F001 R 1 0x396D 0x0001 Locked Rotor1 Event F001 R 1 0x3982 0x0001 Locked Rotor2 Event F001 R 1 0x3997 0x0001 Locked Rotor3 Event F001 R 1 0x399A 0x00...

Страница 628: ...D_F F004 1 R W 1 1 50 ms Ajuste Tipo de Entrada Tarjeta F 32 elementos Board F Input Type Setting 32 items 0x1E45 Input Type_F_CC1 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE EDGE 1 NEGATIVE EDGE 2 POSITIVE 3 NEGATIVE 0x1E46 Input Type_F_CC2 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE EDGE 1 NEGATIVE EDGE 2 POSITIVE 3 NEGATIVE 0x1E64 Input Type_F_CC32 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE EDGE 1 NEGATIVE EDGE 2 POSITIVE 3 NEGATIVE Ajuste Tiempo Retar...

Страница 629: ...7 Pulse Output Time_F_02 F005 1 R W 2 0 60000 ms 0x1EE3 Pulse Output Time_F_16 F005 1 R W 2 0 60000 ms 0x1EE5 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED Ajuste Rango de Entrada Analogica F 8 elementos Board F Analog Input Range Settings 8 items 0x1EEA Range_F_01 F012 1 R W 1 0 NONE 1 1 to 0 mA 2 0 to 1 mA 3 1 to 1 mA 4 0 to 5 mA 5 0 to 10 mA 6 0 to 20 mA 7 4 to 20 mA 0x1EEB Range_F_02 F012 ...

Страница 630: ...ress W 1 Ajustes Tarjeta G Board G Settings Ajustes de Tensión Tarjeta G Board G Voltage Settings 0x1FE6 Voltage Threshold A_G F004 1 R W 1 10 230 V 0x1FE7 Voltage Threshold B_G F004 1 R W 1 10 230 V 0x208B Voltage Threshold C_G F004 1 R W 1 10 230 V 0x208C Voltage Threshold D_G F004 1 R W 1 10 230 V Tiempo Antirrebotes Tarjeta G Board G Debounce Time Settings 0x1FE8 Debounce Time A_G F004 1 R W 1...

Страница 631: ...0x2069 Output Type_G_16 F012 1 R W 1 0 NORMAL 1 PULSE 2 LATCH Ajustes Tiempo Pulso de Salida Tarjeta G Board G Pulse Output Time Settings 16 items 0x206A Pulse Output Time_G_01 F005 1 R W 2 0 60000 ms 0x206C Pulse Output Time_G_02 F005 1 R W 2 0 60000 ms 0x2088 Pulse Output Time_G_16 F005 1 R W 2 0 60000 ms 0x208A Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED Ajuste Rango de Entrada Analogica ...

Страница 632: ...H MODULO CIO Board H Settings CIO MODULE Ajustes Tipo Tarjeta H Board H Board Type Settings 0x2F5B I O Board Type_H F012 1 R W 1 0 NONE 1 16INP 8OUT 2 8INP 8OUT SUPV 4 32INP 5 16INP 8ANA Ajustes de Tensión Tarjeta H Board H Voltage Settings 0x2F5C Voltage Threshold A_H F004 1 R W 1 10 230 V 0x2F5D Voltage Threshold B_H F004 1 R W 1 10 230 V 0x3001 Voltage Threshold C_H F004 1 R W 1 10 230 V 0x3002...

Страница 633: ...juste Lógica de Salidas Tarjeta H 16 elementos Board H Output Logic Settings 16 items 0x2FC0 Output Logic_H_01 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE 1 NEGATIVE 0x2FC1 Output Logic_H_02 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE 1 NEGATIVE 0x2FCF Output Logic_H_16 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE 1 NEGATIVE Ajuste Tipo de Salidas Tarjeta H 16 elementos Board H Output Type Settings 16 items 0x2FD0 Output Type_H_01 F012 1 R W 1 0 NORMAL 1 PU...

Страница 634: ...999 99 0x301F Max Value_H_02 F003 1 R W 2 9999 99 9999 99 0x302B Max Value_H_08 F003 1 R W 2 9999 99 9999 99 0x30FF Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Tarjeta J MODULO CIO Board J Settings CIO MODULE Ajustes Tipo Tarjeta J Board J Board Type Settings 0x3100 I O Board Type_J F012 1 R W 1 0 NONE 1 16INP 8OUT 2 8INP 8OUT SUPV 4 32INP 5 16INP 8ANA Ajustes de Tensión Tarjeta J Board J Voltage Settings 0x...

Страница 635: ...ustes Lógica de Salidas Tarjeta J 16 elementos Board J Output Logic Settings 16 items 0x3165 Output Logic_J_01 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE 1 NEGATIVE 0x3166 Output Logic_J_02 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE 1 NEGATIVE 0x3174 Output Logic_J_16 F012 1 R W 1 0 POSITIVE 1 NEGATIVE Ajustes Tipo de Salidas Tarjeta J 16 elementos Board J Output Type Settings 16 items 0x3175 Output Type_J_01 F012 1 R W 1 0 NORMAL 1 P...

Страница 636: ... 0x31C4 Max Value_J_02 F003 1 R W 2 9999 99 9999 99 0x31D0 Max Value_J_08 F003 1 R W 2 9999 99 9999 99 0x32A4 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Generales General Settings 0x218A Phase CT Ratio F003 1 R W 2 1 0 6000 0 0x218C Ground CT Ratio F003 1 R W 2 1 0 6000 0 0x218E Stv Ground CT Ratio F003 1 R W 2 1 0 6000 0 0x2190 Phase VT Ratio F003 1 R W 2 1 0 6000 0 0x2192 Phase VT Connection F012 1 R W 1 ...

Страница 637: ...1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2228 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x223B Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 3 Phase IOC High 3 Settings 0x223C Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x223D Input F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASOR DFT 1 RMS 0x223E Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x2240 Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2242 Reset...

Страница 638: ...obreintensidad Instantánea de Neutro Grupo 1 Neutral IOC 1 Settings 0x22AC Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x22AD Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x22AF Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x22B1 Reset Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x22B3 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x22C6 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Neutro Grupo 2 N...

Страница 639: ...00 900 00 s 0x2321 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2334 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Tierra Grupo 3 Ground IOC 3 Settings 0x2335 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2336 Input F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASOR DFT 1 RMS 0x2337 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x2339 Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x233B Reset Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00...

Страница 640: ...A 0x238D Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x238F Reset Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2391 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x23A4 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 1 Phase TOC High 1 Settings 0x23A5 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x23A6 Input F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASOR DFT 1 RMS 0x23A7 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 ...

Страница 641: ...ve C 6 IEC Long Time Inv 7 IEC Short Time Inv 8 IAC Ext Inv 9 IAC Very Inv 10 IAC Mod Inv 11 ANSI Ext Inv 12 ANSI Very Inv 13 ANSI Norm Inv 14 ANSI Mod Inv 15 I2t 16 Definite Time 17 Rectifier Curve 18 User Curve A 19 User Curve B 20 User Curve C 21 User Curve D 0x23C7 TD Multiplier F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x23C9 Reset F012 1 R W 1 0 INSTANTANEOUS 1 LINEAR 0x23CA Voltage Restraint F012 1 R W 1 ...

Страница 642: ... 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x23E8 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x23FB Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Neutro Grupo 1 Neutral TOC 1 Settings 0x23FC Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x23FD Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x23FF Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 IEEE Ext Inv 1 IEEE Very Inv 2 IEEE Mod Inv 3 IEC Curve A 4 IEC Curve B 5 IEC C...

Страница 643: ...R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x241A Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 IEEE Ext Inv 1 IEEE Very Inv 2 IEEE Mod Inv 3 IEC Curve A 4 IEC Curve B 5 IEC Curve C 6 IEC Long Time Inv 7 IEC Short Time Inv 8 IAC Ext Inv 9 IAC Very Inv 10 IAC Mod Inv 11 ANSI Ext Inv 12 ANSI Very Inv 13 ANSI Norm Inv 14 ANSI Mod Inv 15 I2t 16 Definite Time 17 Rectifier Curve 18 User Curve A 19 User Curve B 20 User Curve C 21 User Curve D 0x241B T...

Страница 644: ...Curve A 19 User Curve B 20 User Curve C 21 User Curve D 0x2436 TD Multiplier F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2438 Reset F012 1 R W 1 0 INSTANTANEOUS 1 LINEAR 0x2439 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x244C Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra Grupo 1 Ground TOC 1 Settings 0x244D Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x244E Input F012 1 R W 1 0 PH...

Страница 645: ... Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x246A Input F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASOR DFT 1 RMS 0x246B Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x246D Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 IEEE Ext Inv 1 IEEE Very Inv 2 IEEE Mod Inv 3 IEC Curve A 4 IEC Curve B 5 IEC Curve C 6 IEC Long Time Inv 7 IEC Short Time Inv 8 IAC Ext Inv 9 IAC Very Inv 10 IAC Mod Inv 11 ANSI Ext Inv 12 ANSI Very Inv 13 ANSI Norm Inv 14 ANSI Mod Inv...

Страница 646: ...e 17 Rectifier Curve 18 User Curve A 19 User Curve B 20 User Curve C 21 User Curve D 0x248A TD Multiplier F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x248C Reset F012 1 R W 1 0 INSTANTANEOUS 1 LINEAR 0x248D Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x24A0 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Tierra Sensible Grupo 1 Sensitive Ground TOC 1 Settings 0x24A1 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 D...

Страница 647: ...sitive Ground TOC 2 Settings 0x24BD Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x24BE Input F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASOR DFT 1 RMS 0x24BF Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 005 16 000 A 0x24C1 Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 IEEE Ext Inv 1 IEEE Very Inv 2 IEEE Mod Inv 3 IEC Curve A 4 IEC Curve B 5 IEC Curve C 6 IEC Long Time Inv 7 IEC Short Time Inv 8 IAC Ext Inv 9 IAC Very Inv 10 IAC Mod Inv 11 ANSI Ext Inv 12 ANSI Very ...

Страница 648: ...User Curve B 20 User Curve C 21 User Curve D 0x24DE TD Multiplier F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x24E0 Reset F012 1 R W 1 0 INSTANTANEOUS 1 LINEAR 0x24E1 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x24F4 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Subtensión de Fases Grupo 1 Phase UV 1 Settings 0x24F5 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x24F6 Mode F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASE PHASE 1 PHASE GROUND 0x24F7 ...

Страница 649: ...on F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2534 Mode F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASE PHASE 1 PHASE GROUND 0x2535 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 3 300 V 0x2537 Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 DEFINITE TIME 1 INVERSE TIME 0x2538 Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x253A Minimum Voltage F003 1 R W 2 0 300 V 0x253C Logic F012 1 R W 1 0 ANY PHASE 1 TWO PHASES 2 ALL PHASES 0x253D Supervised by 52 F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x253...

Страница 650: ...25A4 Heat Time Constant F003 1 R W 2 3 0 600 0 min 0x25A6 Cool Time Constant F003 1 R W 2 1 00 6 00 0x25A8 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x25AA Alarm Level F003 1 R W 2 1 0 110 0 0x25AC Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x25BF Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Imagen Térmica Grupo 2 Thermal Model 2 Settings 0x25C0 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x25C1 Heat Time...

Страница 651: ...apshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x262F Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Unidad Direccional de Fases Grupo 3 Phase Directional 3 Settings 0x2630 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2631 MTA F003 1 R W 2 90 90 Deg 0x2633 Direction F012 1 R W 1 0 REVERSE 1 FORWARD 0x2634 Block Logic F012 1 R W 1 0 PERMISSION 1 BLOCK 0x2635 Pol V Threshold F003 1 R W 2 0 300 V 0x2637 Snapshot ...

Страница 652: ...1 ENABLED 0x2684 MTA F003 1 R W 2 90 90 Deg 0x2686 Direction F012 1 R W 1 0 REVERSE 1 FORWARD 0x2687 Polarization F012 1 R W 1 0 VO 1 IP 2 VO IP 3 VO IP 0x2688 Block Logic F012 1 R W 1 0 PERMISSION 1 BLOCK 0x2689 Pol V Threshold F003 1 R W 2 0 300 V 0x268B Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x269E Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Unidad Direccional de Tierra Grupo 1 Ground Direction...

Страница 653: ...1 R W 1 0 VO 1 IP 2 VO IP 3 VO IP 0x26DC Block Logic F012 1 R W 1 0 PERMISSION 1 BLOCK 0x26DD Pol V Threshold F003 1 R W 2 0 300 V 0x26DF Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x26F2 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Fallo Interruptor Breaker Failure Settings 0x26F3 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x26F4 Supervision Pickup F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x26F6 Hiset Pickup F003 1...

Страница 654: ...LED 1 ENABLED 0x2745 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2762 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Reenganchador Recloser Settings 0x2763 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2764 Max Number Shots F004 1 R W 1 1 4 0x2765 Dead Time 1 F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2767 Dead Time 2 F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2769 Dead Time 3 F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x276B Dead Time 4 F003 1 R ...

Страница 655: ...ow 1 Settings 0x27DD Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x27DE Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 3 300 V 0x27E0 Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x27E2 Reset Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x27E4 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x27F7 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobretensión de Neutro Nivel Bajo Grupo 2 Neutral OV Low 2 Settings 0x27F8 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED...

Страница 656: ... Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2861 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Subtensión Auxiliar Grupo 3 Auxiliary UV 3 Settings 0x2862 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2863 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 3 300 V 0x2865 Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 DEFINITE TIME 1 INVERSE TIME 0x2866 Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2868 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x287B Confi...

Страница 657: ...W 1 Ajustes Sobretensión Auxiliar Grupo 1 Auxiliary OV 1 Settings 0x28D0 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x28D1 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 3 300 V 0x28D3 Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x28D5 Reset Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x28D7 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x28EA Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobretensión Auxiliar Grupo 2 Auxiliary OV 2 Settings 0...

Страница 658: ...ve 18 User Curve A 19 User Curve B 20 User Curve C 21 User Curve D 0x2925 TD Multiplier F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2927 Reset F012 1 R W 1 0 INSTANTANEOUS 1 LINEAR 0x2928 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x293B Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Secuencia Negativa Grupo 2 Negative Sequence TOC 2 Settings 0x293C Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENAB...

Страница 659: ...ive Sequence TOC 3 Settings 0x2957 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2958 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x295A Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 IEEE Ext Inv 1 IEEE Very Inv 2 IEEE Mod Inv 3 IEC Curve A 4 IEC Curve B 5 IEC Curve C 6 IEC Long Time Inv 7 IEC Short Time Inv 8 IAC Ext Inv 9 IAC Very Inv 10 IAC Mod Inv 11 ANSI Ext Inv 12 ANSI Very Inv 13 ANSI Norm Inv 14 ANSI Mod Inv 15 I2t 16 ...

Страница 660: ...1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x29AD Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 20 00 65 00 Hz 0x29AF Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x29B1 Reset Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x29B3 Minimum Voltage F003 1 R W 2 10 300 V 0x29B5 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x29C8 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Subfrecuencia Grupo 1 Underfrequency 1 Settings 0x29C9 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ...

Страница 661: ... W 1 Ajustes Localizador de Faltas Fault Report Settings 0x2A93 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2A94 Pos Seq Module F003 1 R W 2 0 01 250 00 Ohm 0x2A96 Pos Seq Angle F003 1 R W 2 25 90 Deg 0x2A98 Zero Seq Module F003 1 R W 2 0 01 750 00 Ohm 0x2A9A Zero Seq Angle F003 1 R W 2 25 90 Deg 0x2A9C Line Length F003 1 R W 2 0 0 2000 0 0x2A9E Show Fault On HMI F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED...

Страница 662: ...C0B Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2C0D Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2C0E Operation Threshold F003 1 R W 2 0 000 1 000 A 0x2C20 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Conductor Roto Grupo 2 Broken conductor 2 Settings 0x2C21 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2C22 Tap F003 1 R W 2 20 0 100 0 0x2C24 Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2C26 Snapshot Events F01...

Страница 663: ... IP Address Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C57 Netmask Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C58 Netmask Oct2 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C59 Netmask Oct3 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C5A Netmask Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C5B Gateway IP Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C5C Gateway IP Oct2 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C5D Gateway IP Oct3 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C5E Gateway IP Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2C86 Confirmation address W 1 ADDRESS ...

Страница 664: ...4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2CC2 IP Addr Client2 Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2CC3 IP Addr Client2 Oct2 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2CC4 IP Addr Client2 Oct3 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2CC5 IP Addr Client2 Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2CC6 IP Addr Client3 Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2CC7 IP Addr Client3 Oct2 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2CC8 IP Addr Client3 Oct3 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2CC9 IP Addr Client3 Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2...

Страница 665: ...012 1 R W 1 0 0 00001 1 0 0001 2 0 001 3 0 01 4 0 1 5 1 6 10 7 100 8 1000 9 10000 0x2CDE Other Scale Factor F012 1 R W 1 0 0 00001 1 0 0001 2 0 001 3 0 01 4 0 1 5 1 6 10 7 100 8 1000 9 10000 0x2CDF Current Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2CE1 Voltage Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2CE3 Power Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2CE5 Energy Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2CE7 Other Deadband F005 1 R W...

Страница 666: ... F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2CEE Binary Input Block 4 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 ...

Страница 667: ... 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2CF2 Binary Input Block 8 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2CF3 Binary Input Block 9 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CT...

Страница 668: ...D28 IP Addr Client3 Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D29 IP Addr Client3 Oct2 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D2A IP Addr Client3 Oct3 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D2B IP Addr Client3 Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D2C IP Addr Client4 Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D2D IP Addr Client4 Oct2 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D2E IP Addr Client4 Oct3 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D2F IP Addr Client4 Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D30 IP Addr Client5 Oct1...

Страница 669: ... Other Scale Factor F012 1 R W 1 0 0 00001 1 0 0001 2 0 001 3 0 01 4 0 1 5 1 6 10 7 100 8 1000 9 10000 0x2D41 Current Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2D43 Voltage Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2D45 Power Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2D47 Energy Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2D49 Other Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2D4B Msg Fragment Size F005 1 R W 2 30 2048 0x2D4D Binary Input Block 1 F01...

Страница 670: ...EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2D50 Binary Input Block 4 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2D51 Binary Input Block 5 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT US...

Страница 671: ...SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2D54 Binary Input Block 8 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2D55 Binary Input Block 9 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65...

Страница 672: ...3 Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D8B IP Addr Client3 Oct2 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D8C IP Addr Client3 Oct3 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D8D IP Addr Client3 Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D8E IP Addr Client4 Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D8F IP Addr Client4 Oct2 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D90 IP Addr Client4 Oct3 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D91 IP Addr Client4 Oct4 F004 1 R W 1 0 255 0x2D92 IP Addr Client5 Oct1 F004 1 R W 1 0 25...

Страница 673: ...0x2DA2 Other Scale Factor F012 1 R W 1 0 0 00001 1 0 0001 2 0 001 3 0 01 4 0 1 5 1 6 10 7 100 8 1000 9 10000 0x2DA3 Current Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2DA5 Voltage Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2DA7 Power Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2DA9 Energy Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2DAB Other Deadband F005 1 R W 2 0 65535 0x2DAD Msg Fragment Size F005 1 R W 2 30 2048 0x2DAF Binary Input Block...

Страница 674: ... 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2DB2 Binary Input Block 4 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2DB3 Binary Input ...

Страница 675: ...R 9 16 0x2DB6 Binary Input Block 8 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL EVENTS 81 96 7 CTL EVENTS 97 112 8 CTL EVENTS 113 128 9 SWITCHGEAR 1 8 10 SWITCHGEAR 9 16 0x2DB7 Binary Input Block 9 F012 1 R W 1 0 NOT USED 1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 5 CTL EVENTS 65 80 6 CTL...

Страница 676: ...2 2 70 V 0x2E1A Il LEVEL F003 1 R W 2 0 005 0 400 A 0x2E1C Vl LEVEL F003 1 R W 2 2 70 V 0x2E1E Ih LEVEL F003 1 R W 2 0 005 0 400 A 0x2E20 Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2E22 Time to inst F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2E24 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2E37 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Unidad Sobreintensidad Instantánea de Tierra Aislada Grupo 3 Isolated Ground IOC 3 Se...

Страница 677: ...nfirmation address W 1 Ajustes Unidad Direccional de Tierra Sensible Grupo 3 Sensitive Ground Directional 3 Settings 0x2E8F Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2E90 MTA F003 1 R W 2 90 90 Deg 0x2E92 Direction F012 1 R W 1 0 REVERSE 1 FORWARD 0x2E93 Block Logic F012 1 R W 1 0 PERMISSION 1 BLOCK 0x2E94 Pol V Threshold F003 1 R W 2 0 300 V 0x2E96 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENA...

Страница 678: ...00 10000 00 MW 0x2EF1 Stage 2 Time F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x2EF3 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2F06 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Demanda Demand Settings 0x2F07 Demand Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x2F08 CRNT Demand Method F012 1 R W 1 0 THERMAL EXPONENTIAL 1 BLOCK INTERVAL 2 ROLLING DEMAND 0x2F09 POWER Demand Method F012 1 R W 1 0 THERMAL EXPONENTIAL 1 B...

Страница 679: ...7 Rectifier Curve 18 User Curve A 19 User Curve B 20 User Curve C 21 User Curve D 0x32AA TD Multiplier F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x32AC Reset F012 1 R W 1 0 INSTANTANEOUS 1 LINEAR 0x32AD Voltage Restraint F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x32AE Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x32C1 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 2 Phase T...

Страница 680: ...Ajustes Sobreintensidad Temporizada de Fases Nivel Alto Grupo 3 Phase TOC Low 3 Settings 0x32DF Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x32E0 Input F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASOR DFT 1 RMS 0x32E1 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 05 160 00 A 0x32E3 Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 IEEE Ext Inv 1 IEEE Very Inv 2 IEEE Mod Inv 3 IEC Curve A 4 IEC Curve B 5 IEC Curve C 6 IEC Long Time Inv 7 IEC Short Time Inv 8 IAC Ext Inv ...

Страница 681: ...W 1 0 30000 ms 0x332C Snapshot Events SWGR 1 F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x332D Snapshot Events SWGR 2 F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x333B Snapshot Events SWGR 16 F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x334C Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Interruptor Breaker Settings 0x334D Number of Switchgear F004 1 R W 1 1 16 0x334E Maximum KI2t F003 1 R W 2 0 00 9999 99 KA 2 s 0x3350 KI2t Integ Time F...

Страница 682: ...003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x34BB Time 0 66xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x34BD Time 0 68xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x34BF Time 0 70xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x34C1 Time 0 72xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x34C3 Time 0 74xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x34C5 Time 0 76xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x34C7 Time 0 78xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x...

Страница 683: ...P OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3521 Time 3 90xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3523 Time 4 00xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3525 Time 4 10xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3527 Time 4 20xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3529 Time 4 30xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x352B Time 4 40xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x352D Time 4 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3...

Страница 684: ...stes Curva Usuario B Flex Curves B Settings 0x3599 Time 0 00xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x359B Time 0 05xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x359D Time 0 10xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x359F Time 0 15xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x35A1 Time 0 20xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x35A3 Time 0 25xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x35A5 Time 0 30xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 ...

Страница 685: ...1 90xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x35FF Time 2 00xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3601 Time 2 10xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3603 Time 2 20xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3605 Time 2 30xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3607 Time 2 40xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3609 Time 2 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x360B Time 2 60xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 53...

Страница 686: ...000 65 535 s 0x3665 Time 11 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3667 Time 12 00xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3669 Time 12 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x366B Time 13 00xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x366D Time 13 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x366F Time 14 00xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3671 Time 14 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3673 Time 15 0...

Страница 687: ...xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x36DD Time 0 91xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x36DF Time 0 92xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x36E1 Time 0 93xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x36E3 Time 0 94xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x36E5 Time 0 95xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x36E7 Time 0 96xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x36E9 Time 0 97xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 6...

Страница 688: ...743 Time 5 20xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3745 Time 5 30xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3747 Time 5 40xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3749 Time 5 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x374B Time 5 60xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x374D Time 5 70xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x374F Time 5 80xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3751 Time 5 90xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 ...

Страница 689: ...KP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x37BB Time 0 54xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x37BD Time 0 56xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x37BF Time 0 58xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x37C1 Time 0 60xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x37C3 Time 0 62xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x37C5 Time 0 64xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x37C7 Time 0 66xPKP RST F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 ...

Страница 690: ... s 0x381F Time 3 20xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3821 Time 3 30xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3823 Time 3 40xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3825 Time 3 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3827 Time 3 60xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3829 Time 3 70xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x382B Time 3 80xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x382D Time 3 90xPKP OP F003 1 R ...

Страница 691: ...P OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3875 Time 13 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3877 Time 14 00xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3879 Time 14 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x387B Time 15 00xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x387D Time 15 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x387F Time 16 00xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x3881 Time 16 50xPKP OP F003 1 R W 2 0 000 65 53...

Страница 692: ... R W 1 0 1 s 1 5 Minutes 2 10 Minutes 3 15 Minutes 4 20 Minutes 5 30 Minutes 6 60 Minutes 0x38D6 Data Logger Chnl 1 F004 1 R W 1 0 32767 0x38D7 Data Logger Chnl 2 F004 1 R W 1 0 32767 0x38D8 Data Logger Chnl 3 F004 1 R W 1 0 32767 0x38D9 Data Logger Chnl 4 F004 1 R W 1 0 32767 0x38DA Data Logger Chnl 5 F004 1 R W 1 0 32767 0x38DB Data Logger Chnl 6 F004 1 R W 1 0 32767 0x38DC Data Logger Chnl 7 F0...

Страница 693: ... 1 Tap F003 1 R W 2 10000 00 10000 00 MW 0x3924 Stage 1 Time F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x3926 Dir Power Angle 2 F003 1 R W 2 0 00 359 99 Deg 0x3928 Stage 2 Tap F003 1 R W 2 10000 00 10000 00 MW 0x392A Stage 2 Time F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x392C Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x393F Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes unidad direccional de potencia Grupo 3 Directional Power 3 Se...

Страница 694: ...R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x398E Input F012 1 R W 1 0 PHASOR DFT 1 RMS 0x398F Full Load Current F003 1 R W 2 0 10 10 00 KA 0x3991 Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 1 01 109 00 0x3993 Trip Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x3995 Reset Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x3997 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x39A1 Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Comunicaciones Remotas Remote Communication...

Страница 695: ...4 UserSt 2 96 UserSt 64 0x3EFA Default Value 32 F012 1 R W 1 0 OFF 1 ON Ajustes Entradas Remotas 32 elementos Remote Inputs Settings 32 items 2 Latest OFF 3 Latest ON 0x3EFB Events Remote Inp F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x3F5B Confirmation address Ajustes Sincronizacion SNTP SNTP synchronization Settings Do not apply to C650 models SNTP 0x3F5C Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 UNICAST 2 BRO...

Страница 696: ...Origin 2 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 F 1 G 2 H 3 J 0x3FB5 PulseCntr Input Origin 2 F004 1 000 R W 1 1 32 0x3FB6 PulseCntr Enabled 3 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x3FB7 PulseCntr Name 3 F009 1 000 R W 16 0x3FC7 PulseCntr Factor 3 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 000 65000 000 0x3FC9 PulseCntr Overflow 3 F005 1 000 R W 2 0 1000000 0x3FCB PulseCntr Board Origin 3 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 F 1 G 2 H 3 J 0x3FCC PulseCntr I...

Страница 697: ...1 000 R W 1 0 F 1 G 2 H 3 J 0x4011 PulseCntr Input Origin 6 F004 1 000 R W 1 1 32 0x4012 PulseCntr Enabled 7 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x4013 PulseCntr Name 7 F009 1 000 R W 16 0x4023 PulseCntr Factor 7 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 000 65000 000 0x4025 PulseCntr Overflow 7 F005 1 000 R W 2 0 1000000 0x4027 PulseCntr Board Origin 7 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 F 1 G 2 H 3 J 0x4028 PulseCntr Input Origin 7 ...

Страница 698: ...03 F004 1 000 R W 1 0x406A Analog Maximum 03 F003 1 000 R W 2 100000 000 100000 000 0x406C Analog Minimum 03 F003 1 000 R W 2 100000 000 100000 000 0x406E Analog Delay 03 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x4070 Analog Hysteresis 03 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 0 50 0 0x4072 Analog Direction 03 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 OUT 1 IN 0x4073 Analog Input 04 F004 1 000 R W 1 0x4074 Analog Maximum 04 F003 1 000 R W 2 100000 ...

Страница 699: ... 0 50 0 0x40A4 Analog Direction 08 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 OUT 1 IN 0x40A5 Analog Input 09 F004 1 000 R W 1 0x40A6 Analog Maximum 09 F003 1 000 R W 2 100000 000 100000 000 0x40A8 Analog Minimum 09 F003 1 000 R W 2 100000 000 100000 000 0x40AA Analog Delay 09 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x40AC Analog Hysteresis 09 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 0 50 0 0x40AE Analog Direction 09 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 OUT 1 IN 0x40AF...

Страница 700: ... 00 s 0x40DE Analog Hysteresis 14 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 0 50 0 0x40E0 Analog Direction 14 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 OUT 1 IN 0x40E1 Analog Input 15 F004 1 000 R W 1 0x40E2 Analog Maximum 15 F003 1 000 R W 2 100000 000 100000 000 0x40E4 Analog Minimum 15 F003 1 000 R W 2 100000 000 100000 000 0x40E6 Analog Delay 15 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x40E8 Analog Hysteresis 15 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 0 50 0 0x40EA An...

Страница 701: ... 0x4116 Analog Minimum 20 F003 1 000 R W 2 100000 000 100000 000 0x4118 Analog Delay 20 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 00 900 00 s 0x411A Analog Hysteresis 20 F003 1 000 R W 2 0 0 50 0 0x411C Analog Direction 20 F012 1 000 R W 1 0 OUT 1 IN 0x412F Confirmation address W 1 Ajustes Derivada de Frecuencia 1 Frequency Rate of Change 1 Settings 0x4130 Function F012 1 000 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x4131 Freq Rate ...

Страница 702: ...ate OV Supv F003 1 000 R W 2 0 00 110 00 0x4156 Freq Rate Min F003 1 000 R W 2 20 00 80 00 Hz 0x4158 Freq Rate Max F003 1 000 R W 2 20 00 80 00 Hz 0x415A Freq Rate Delay F003 1 000 R W 2 0 00 60 00 s 0x415C Snapshot Events F012 1 000 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x416F Confirmation address W 1 ADDRESS BIT NAME FORMAT STEP MODE LENGTH MISCELLANEOUS ...

Страница 703: ...oachment 1 0x4190 Function F012 1 000 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x4191 Min Voltage F003 1 000 R W 2 0 00 300 00 V 0x4193 Reach F003 1 000 R W 2 0 02 250 00 Ohm 0x4195 Angle F003 1 000 R W 2 5 50 Deg 0x4197 Pickup Delay F003 1 000 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x4199 Reset Delay F003 1 000 R W 2 0 000 65 535 s 0x419B Snapshot Events F012 1 000 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x41AE Confirmation address W 1 Inve...

Страница 704: ...ection F012 1 R W 1 0 IN 1 IG 0x44A4 OC Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 005 0 400 A 0x44A6 OC Pickup Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 600 00 s 0x44A8 Power Pickup F003 1 R W 2 0 01 4 50 W 0x44AA MTA F004 1 R W 1 0 360 Deg 0x44AB Power Pickup Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 600 00 s 0x44AD Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 DEFINITE TIME 1 INVERSE TIME 2 USER CURVE A 3 USER CURVE B 4 USER CURVE C 5 USER CURVE D 0x44AE Multiplier F00...

Страница 705: ...Curve F012 1 R W 1 0 DEFINITE TIME 1 INVERSE TIME 2 USER CURVE A 3 USER CURVE B 4 USER CURVE C 5 USER CURVE D 0x44E4 Multiplier F003 1 R W 2 0 02 2 00 s 0x44E6 Snapshot Events F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x44F0 Confirmation address W 1 32N1 Low wattmetric Ground Fault Low Level Group 1 Settings 0x44F1 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x44F2 Voltage Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 2 00 70...

Страница 706: ... 1 32N3 Low wattmetric Ground Fault Low Level Group 3 Settings 0x4527 Function F012 1 R W 1 0 DISABLED 1 ENABLED 0x4528 Voltage Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 2 00 70 00 V 0x452A Current Selection F012 1 R W 1 0 IN 1 IG 0x452B OC Pickup Level F003 1 R W 2 0 005 0 400 A 0x452D OC Pickup Delay F003 1 R W 2 0 00 600 00 s 0x452F Power Pickup F003 1 R W 2 0 01 4 50 W 0x4531 MTA F004 1 R W 1 0 360 Deg 0x4532...

Страница 707: ...Y F012 1 R W 1 0 Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Friday 5 Saturday 6 Sunday 0x4554 DST START DAY INST F012 1 R W 1 0 First 1 Second 2 Third 3 Fourth 4 Last 0x4555 DST START HOUR F004 1 R W 1 0 23 0x4556 DST STOP MONTH F012 1 R W 1 0 JAN 1 FEB 2 MAR 3 APR 4 MAY 5 JUN 6 JUL 7 AUG 8 SEP 9 OCT 10 NOV 11 DEC 0x4557 DST STOP WEEKDAY F012 1 R W 1 0 Monday 1 Tuesday 2 Wednesday 3 Thursday 4 Frid...

Страница 708: ...x0400 Operation 11 F001 W 1 0xAFFE 0x0800 Operation 12 F001 W 1 0xAFFE 0x1000 Operation 13 F001 W 1 0xAFFE 0x2000 Operation 14 F001 W 1 0xAFFE 0x4000 Operation 15 F001 W 1 0xAFFE 0x8000 Operation 16 F001 W 1 0xAFFF 0x0001 Operation 17 F001 W 1 0xAFFF 0x0002 Operation 18 F001 W 1 0xAFFF 0x0004 Operation 19 F001 W 1 0xAFFF 0x0008 Operation 20 F001 W 1 0xAFFF 0x0010 Operation 21 F001 W 1 0xAFFF 0x002...

Страница 709: ...F011 R 64 0xF1E4 Date Time of the 113 128 alarms F011 R 64 0xF224 Date Time of the 129 144 alarms F011 R 64 0xF264 Date Time of the 145 160 alarms F011 R 64 0xF2A4 Date Time of the 161 176 alarms F011 R 64 0xF2E4 Date Time of the 177 192 alarms F011 R 64 0xF324 Alarm acknowledge F001 W 12 1st byte 1st eight alarms First alarm bit less significant 2nd byte 2nd eight alarms Ninth alarm bit less sign...

Страница 710: ...e F005 R 2 0xFF02 Size of currently available data block of events file F004 R 1 0xFF03 Block of data requested events file 122 items F004 R 1 Ficheros Oscilografía y Reporte de Faltas Oscillography and Fault Report Files 0xFF40 Character position of current block within osc file F005 R 2 0xFF42 Size of currently available data block of osc file F004 R 1 0xFF43 Block of data requested osc file 122...

Страница 711: ...SIGNED INT 16 BIT BITMASK F002 SIGNED INT 32 BIT F003 FLOAT 32 BIT F004 SIGNED INT 16 BIT F005 SIGNED INT 32 BIT F006 DOUBLE 64 BIT F007 UNSIGNED INT 8 BIT F008 SIGNED INT 8 BIT F009 STRING F011 UNSIGNED INT 64 BIT MILISECONDS FROM 01 01 2000 F012 UNSIGNED INT 16 BIT ENUMERATED ADDRESS BIT NAME FORMAT STEP MODE LENGTH MISCELLANEOUS ...

Страница 712: ...r Client1 Oct3 0 0 to 255 step 1 6 IP Addr Client1 Oct4 0 0 to 255 step 1 7 IP Addr Client2 Oct1 0 0 to 255 step 1 8 IP Addr Client2 Oct2 0 0 to 255 step 1 9 IP Addr Client2 Oct3 0 0 to 255 step 1 10 IP Addr Client2 Oct4 0 0 to 255 step 1 11 IP Addr Client3 Oct1 0 0 to 255 step 1 12 IP Addr Client3 Oct2 0 0 to 255 step 1 13 IP Addr Client3 Oct3 0 0 to 255 step 1 14 IP Addr Client3 Oct4 0 0 to 255 ...

Страница 713: ...xample if the Voltage Scale Factor is set to a value of 1000 all DNP Analog Input points that are voltages will be returned with the values 1000 times smaller e g a value 72000 V on the F650 will be returned as 72 These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP masters Note that a scale factor of 0 1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 i e th...

Страница 714: ...nts Binary Input points 16 31 block 3 represents Binary Input points 32 47 etc The minimum number of Binary Input points that can be selected is 16 1 block If all of the Binary Input Block x settings are set to NOT USED the default list of 160 points will be in effect The F650 will form the Binary Inputs points list from the Binary Input Block x settings up to the first occurrence of a setting val...

Страница 715: ...Level 2 Device Function Master Slave Notable objects functions and or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported the complete list is described in the attached table Binary Inputs Object 1 Binary Inputs Changes Object 2 Binary Outputs Object 10 Analog Inputs Object 30 Analog Input Changes Object 32 Analog Deadbands Object 34 Maximum Data Link String Size octets Transmitte...

Страница 716: ...anning period Packed binary change process period Analog Input change scanning period Unsolicited response notification delay Unsolicited response retry delay Unsolicited offline interval No intentional delay 10 min 10 s 1 ms 1 s 500 ms 500 ms Configurable 0 to 60 s 10 min Sends Executes Control Operations WRITE Binary Outputs SELECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE DIRECT OPERATE NO ACK Never Never Never N...

Страница 717: ...ith Relative Time Configurable attach explanation Sends Unsolicited Responses Never Configurable Only certain objects Sometimes attach explanation ENABLE DISABLE unsolicited Function codes supported Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses Never When Device Restarts When Status Flag Change No other options permitted Default CounterObject Variation No Counters Reported Configurable attach explana...

Страница 718: ...Variation No Description Function Codes dec Qualifier Codes hex Function Codes Qualifier Codes hex 1 0 Binary Input Variation 0 is used to request default variation 1 read 22 assign class 06 no range or all 00 01 start stop 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 1 1 Binary Input 1 read 22 assign class 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 inde...

Страница 719: ...op 17 28 index See Note 2 30 2 16 Bit Analog Input 1 read 22 assign class 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 index See Note 2 30 3 32 Bit Analog Input without Flag 1 read 22 assign class 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 index See Note 2 30 4 16 Bit Analog Input wi...

Страница 720: ...limited qty 17 28 index 50 0 Time and Date All Variations 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 index See Note 2 50 1 Time and Date See Note 1 1 read 2 write 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 07 limited qty 1 08 limited qty 17 28 index 129 response 00 01 start stop 17 28 index See Note 2 52 2 Time Delay Fine 1 read 2 write 12...

Страница 721: ...C states etc DNP Points that correspond to Control Events o Switchgear Contacts that are not configured will have a zero value in the response Using the PLC Editor through the EnerVista 650 Setup program selecting menu Setpoint Logic Configuration it will be possible to implement complex logic more than simple OR and NOT previous functions To perform this in the menu Setpoint Relay Configuration C...

Страница 722: ...r 10 Contact A 147 Switchgear 10 Contact B 148 Switchgear 11 Contact A 149 Switchgear 11 Contact B 150 Switchgear 12 Contact A 151 Switchgear 12 Contact B 152 Switchgear 13 Contact A 153 Switchgear 13 Contact B 154 Switchgear 14 Contact A 155 Switchgear 14 Contact B 156 Switchgear 15 Contact A 157 Switchgear 15 Contact B 158 Switchgear 16 Contact A 159 Switchgear 16 Contact B ...

Страница 723: ...guration from the EnerVista 650 Setup program and then configures Control Events bits and Switchgear bits It is shown in figures 9 1 and 9 2 In the second step the user selects Setpoint System Setup Communication settings DNP in order to change DNP Binary Input Block settings The user set values of the first three Binary Input blocks Binary Input Block1 CTL EVENTS 1 16 Binary Input Block2 CTL EVEN...

Страница 724: ... Bay Controller C 13 APPENDIX C C 5 DNP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES C Figure C 3 CONFIGURATION OF DNP BINARY INPUT BLOCKS In the example presented in this chapter the F650 relay has 48 Binary Input points as shown in the table below ...

Страница 725: ...PKP 11 PH IOC1 LOW A PKP 12 PH IOC1 LOW B PKP 13 PH IOC1 LOW C PKP 14 GROUND IOC1 PKP 15 NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP 16 CONT OP_F_01 17 CONT OP_F_02 18 CONT OP_F_03 19 CONT OP_F_04 20 CONT OP_F_05 21 CONT OP_F_06 22 CONT OP_F_07 23 CONT OP_F_08 POINT INDEX NAME DESCRIPTION 24 Not Configured 25 Not Configured 26 Not Configured 27 Not Configured 28 Not Configured 29 Not Configured 30 Not Configured 31 Not Conf...

Страница 726: ...310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller C 15 APPENDIX C C 5 DNP CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES C 41 Not Configured 42 Not Configured 43 Not Configured 44 Not Configured 45 Not Configured 46 Not Configured 47 Not Configured ...

Страница 727: ...TIPLE DNP 3 0 MASTERS COMMUNICATION WITH F650 Typical architecture of multi master communication using DNP 3 0 Figure C 4 MULTIPLE DNP3 0 MASTERS COMMUNICATING WITH F650 Hub or Switch DNP3 Master 2 Scada Device DNP3 Slave F650 Relay DNP3 over TCP IP DNP3 Master 3 RTU Device DNP3 Master 1 Scada Device ...

Страница 728: ...TCP IP DNP Addr 200 DNP Dest Addr 255 IP Dest 192 168 37 20 TCP Dest Port 20000 DNP 3 0 Master 2 Ethernet Config IP Addr 192 168 37 2 Netmask 255 255 255 0 DNP3 over TCP IP DNP Addr 201 DNP Dest Addr 256 IP Dest 192 168 37 20 TCP Dest Port 20001 DNP 3 0 Master 3 Ethernet Config IP Addr 192 168 37 3 Netmask 255 255 255 0 DNP3 over TCP IP DNP Addr 202 DNP Dest Addr 257 IP Dest 192 168 37 20 TCP Dest...

Страница 729: ...ng the command s name can be done using the EnerVista 650 Setup program BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS Object Number 10 Request Function Codes supported 1 read Default Variation Reported when variation 0 requested 2 Binary Output Status CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS Object Number 12 Request Function Codes supported 3 select 4 operate 5 direct operate 6 direct operate no ack BINARY CONTROL OUTPUT POINTS...

Страница 730: ...eless F650 accepts requests of DNP objects 20 Binary Counters 21 Frozen Counters and 22 Counter Change Events Function codes Immediate Freeze Freeze and Clear etc are accepted and F650 will respond with no objects and the IIN2 1 Object Unknown flag set This behaviour is in conformance with DNP Level 2 Implementation Document 28528 Level 2 DNP 3 00 Implementation ...

Страница 731: ...set to 0 001 and it is desired that a specific Analog Input point that is of type current trigger an event when its value changes by 1 kA then the deadband for this point should be set to 1000 Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to data type Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34 Units for Analog Input points are as follows Cur...

Страница 732: ...Primary kV 21 Va Primary kV 22 Vb Primary kV 23 Vc Primary kV 24 VL Primary kV 25 VBB Primary kV 26 Phase A Reactive Pwr MVAr 27 Phase A Apparent Pwr MVA 28 Phase A Real Pwr MW 29 Phase B Reactive Pwr MVAr 30 Phase B Apparent Pwr MVA 31 Phase B Real Pwr MW 32 Phase C Reactive Pwr MVAr 33 Phase C Apparent Pwr MVA 34 Phase C Real Pwr MW 35 3 Phase Reactive Pwr MVAr 36 3 Phase Apparent Pwr MVA 37 3 P...

Страница 733: ...ostfault Phase C Current Magnitude kA 70 Fault 1 Postfault Phase C Current Angle degrees 71 Fault 1 Postfault Phase AB Voltage Magnitude kV 72 Fault 1 Postfault Phase AB Voltage Angle degrees 73 Fault 1 Postfault Phase BC Voltage Magnitude kV 74 Fault 1 Postfault Phase BC Voltage Angle degrees 75 Fault 1 Postfault Phase CA Voltage Magnitude kV 76 Fault 1 Postfault Phase CA Voltage Angle degrees 77...

Страница 734: ...ue corresponding to TRIPH fault type will be 2000 NAF indicates that the type of fault has not been calculated 103 Board G Analog 8 104 Board H Analog 1 105 Board H Analog 2 106 Board H Analog 3 107 Board H Analog 4 108 Board H Analog 5 109 Board H Analog 6 110 Board H Analog 7 111 Board H Analog 8 112 Board J Analog 1 113 Board J Analog 2 114 Board J Analog 3 115 Board J Analog 4 116 Board J Anal...

Страница 735: ...C 24 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB C 8 ANALOG INPUTS APPENDIX C C ...

Страница 736: ...TION D APPENDIX D IEC 60870 5 104 PROTOCOLD 1INTRODUCTION The F650 implements functionality of an IEC 60870 5 104 server The devices responds to client requests or can send spontaneous transmissions F650 implementation of 60870 5 104 provides analog meterings and states ...

Страница 737: ...link layer ASDU address takes up 2 bytes Communication frames can be control or data frames Control strings do not have ASDU inside A frame is consist on 3 parts 2 of them are not always present Link data ASDU header ASDU data The data between brackets can be omitted In IEC104 communication is made by TCP IP protocols Actually it is a TCP communication The default port is the 2404 The F650 is list...

Страница 738: ...r Double point information 16 states for Switchgear Spontaneous Transmission 2 ASDU for measured values timing is set in Cyclic Meter Period 0 means no spontaneous transmission 1 ASDU for single point information in the time the event is produced 128 points in user map 1 ASDU for Double point information in the time the event is produced 16 Switchgear information Clock synchronization Command tran...

Страница 739: ...uration Control Events The User Map contains 128 Binary Inputs To each point of the User Map the user can assign any of the binary states of the F650 relay also is possible to combine those states using OR and NOT functions These states are contact inputs and outputs virtual outputs protection element states PLC states etc The User Map always has a size of 128 Binary Inputs Points in the User Map ...

Страница 740: ...ormation in control direction 45 Single command C_SC_NA_1 System information in control direction 105 Reset process command C_RP_NA_1 The F650 relay has a custom Binary Inputs points list called User Map it is common for any protocol In the case of IEC 104 Protocol those points are GROUP1 and GROUP2 GROUP 1 STATUS POINT DESCRIPTION M_ SP_NA_1 Points 1000 1063 CONTROL EVENTS GROUP 2 STATUS POINT DE...

Страница 741: ...001 Phasor Ib Primary 2028 Phase A Real Pwr 2002 Phasor Ic Primary 2029 Phase B Reactive Pwr 2003 Phasor Ig Primary 2030 Phase B Apparent Pwr 2004 Phasor Isg Primary 2031 Phase B Real Pwr 2005 Phasor In Primary 2032 Phase C Reactive Pwr 2006 RMS Ia Primary 2033 Phase C Apparent Pwr 2007 RMS Ib Primary 2034 Phase C Real Pwr 2008 RMS Ic Primary 2035 3 Phase Reactive Pwr 2009 RMS Ig Primary 2036 3 Ph...

Страница 742: ...is command Table D 3 RESET OF PROCESS QRP_RESET_GRAL General reset of process Table D 4 ACQUISITION OF TRANSMISSION DELAY The date in the answer is the same as the received in the command OPERATIONS POINT DESCRIPTION C_SC_NA_1 3000 3011 Command OFF 3000 3011 Command ON CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION POINT DESCRIPTION C_SC_NA_1 0 Set Date RESET OF PROCESS POINT DESCRIPTION C_RP_NA_1 0 Reset of Process DELAY...

Страница 743: ...D 8 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB D 5 IEC 60870 5 104 POINT LIST APPENDIX D D ...

Страница 744: ...dary station initialization ASDU 5 Identification b Control Functions Control requests Primary to Secondary ASDU 100 Control data request Secondary to Primary ASDU 100 Measurements and digital changes transmission ASDU 101 Counters transmission c Control Functions Digital signals status refresh Primary to Secondary ASDU 103 Digital status data request Secondary to Primary ASDU 103 Digital status d...

Страница 745: ...int Communications Serial Ports menu Procome Configuration The procome data configuration is preformed through the Setpoint Procome Configuration tool when communication via Ethernet with the device The procome configuration file can be retrieved and sent to the relay easily The relay must be switched off and on to start working with the new procome configuration set by the user The relay by defau...

Страница 746: ...ransmission mode for application data Mode 1 least significant octet first as defined in 4 10 of IEC 60870 5 4 is used exclusively in this companion standard Common address of ASDU Selection of standard information numbers in monitor direction System functions in monitor direction X EIA RS 485 32 Number of loads for one protection equipment X Glass fibre X Plastic fibre F SMA type connector X BFOC...

Страница 747: ...875 GROUP 1 ACT ON X 24 Characteristic 2 4876 GROUP 2 ACT ON X 25 Characteristic 3 4877 GROUP 3 ACT ON 26 Characteristic 4 27 Auxiliary input 1 28 Auxiliary input 2 29 Auxiliary input 3 30 Auxiliary input 4 INF Semantics F650 Identifier F650 Data Text 32 Measurand supervision I 33 Measurand supervision V 35 Phase sequence supervision X 36 Trip circuit supervision 4539 BREAKER FAIL SUPERVISION 37 I...

Страница 748: ...p L1 3998 4014 4030 4046 4062 4078 41 65 4183 4201 5652 5670 5688 PH IOC TOC 1 2 3 H L A OP X 70 Trip L2 4000 4016 4032 4048 4064 4080 41 67 4185 4203 5654 5672 5690 PH IOC TOC 1 2 3 H L B OP X 71 Trip L3 4002 4018 4034 4050 4066 4082 41 69 4187 4205 5656 5674 5692 PH IOC TOC 1 2 3 H L C OP 72 Trip I back up operation 73 Fault location X in ohms 74 Fault forward line 75 Fault forward lbusbar 76 Te...

Страница 749: ...3 AR BLOCK INF Semantics F650 Identifier F650 Data Text X 144 Measurand I 5064 Ib Primary X 145 Measurands I V 5064 5080 Ib Vab Primary X 146 Measurands I V P Q 5064 5080 5099 5100 Ib Vab P Q Primary X 147 Measurands In Vn 5066 5086 Ig Primary Vn Primary X 148 Measurands IL123 VL123 P Q f 5063 5064 5065 5083 5084 5085 5099 5100 3969 Ia Ib Ic Va Vb Vc P Q Primary Line Frequency INF Semantics 240 Re...

Страница 750: ...4 Activate characteristic 2 25 Activate characteristic 3 26 Activate characteristic 4 INF Semantics 240 Read headings of all defined groups 241 Read values or attributes of all entries of one group 243 Read directory of a single entry 244 Read value or attribute of a single entry 245 End of general interrogation of generic data 248 Write entry 249 Write entry with confirmation 250 Write entry with...

Страница 751: ... IEC 60870 5 103 PROTOCOL APPENDIX F F Miscellaneous Measurand Max MVAL times rated value 1 2 or 2 4 Current L1 X Current L2 X Current L3 X Voltage L1 E X Voltage L2 E X Voltage L3 E X Active power P X Reactive power Q X Frequency f X Voltage L1 L2 X ...

Страница 752: ... master could send a General Interrogation in order to update the complete database The measurands will be send to the primary station as a respond to class 2 request There will be a setting 0 60 min in order to configure the desired interval where 0 means transmission as fast as possible The following functions are supported Initialization General Interrogation Synchronization Commands transmissi...

Страница 753: ...te range 240 241 compatible range 242 253 private range 254 255 compatible range F650 device is identified at the protocol level as overcurrent protection so the Function Type 160 will be used for all the digital and analogues points proposed by the standard and mapped in this profile For the other data supported by the device the customer will have the capability to use them setting a number from...

Страница 754: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller F 9 APPENDIX F F 1 IEC 60870 5 103 PROTOCOL F Control direction 0 255 0 15 system functions 16 31 general commands 240 255 generic functions ...

Страница 755: ...F 10 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB F 1 IEC 60870 5 103 PROTOCOL APPENDIX F F ...

Страница 756: ...M 187 THERMAL3 ALARM 188 OR3 189 OR3 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 200 OR3 outOR1 201 NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP 202 NEUTRAL IOC2 PKP 203 NEUTRAL IOC3 PKP 204 NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP 205 NEUTRAL TOC2 PKP 206 VO_004_50N_PKP 207 VO_005_51N_PKP 208 VO_001_THERMAL_ALARM 214 VO_050_50PL_PKP 215 VO_051_50PH_PKP 216 VO_053_51P_PKP 217 VO_007_PHASE_OVERCURRENT_PKP 218 OR inOR1 inOR2 219 VO_005_51N_PKP 220 inOR3 VO_004_50N_PKP outOR1 ...

Страница 757: ...NS GND IOC3 PKP 194 SENS GND TOC1 PKP 195 SENS GND TOC2 PKP 196 SENS GND TOC3 PKP 197 VO_002_50SG_PKP 198 VO_003_51SG_PKP 199 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 OR3 209 NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP 210 NEG SEQ TOC2 PKP 211 NEG SEQ TOC3 PKP 212 VO_006_I2_TOC_PKP 213 OR 223 VO_049_51G_PKP 224 VO_009_GROUND_OVERCURRENT_PK 225 VO_048_50G_PKP 226 VO_002_50SG_PKP 227 VO_003_5...

Страница 758: ...L OV3 LOW PKP 244 AUXILIARY UV1 PKP 245 AUXILIARY UV2 PKP 246 AUXILIARY UV3 PKP 247 AUXILIARY OV1 PKP 248 AUXILIARY OV2 PKP 249 AUXILIARY OV3 PKP 250 NEG SEQ OV1 PKP 251 NEG SEQ OV2 PKP 252 NEG SEQ OV3 PKP 253 OR3 254 OR3 255 OR3 256 OR3 257 VO_012_59NH_PKP 258 VO_013_59NL_PKP 259 VO_014_27X_PKP 260 VO_015_59X_PKP 261 VO_016_V2_OV_PKP 262 VO_017_ALL_VOLTAGE_PKP 263 VO_012_59NH_PKP 264 VO_013_59NL_...

Страница 759: ...9 FWD PWR2 STG2 PKP 350 inOR1 FWD PWR3 STG1 PKP inOR2 351 inOR3 FWD PWR3 STG2 PKP inOR4 inOR5 352 inOR6 VO_023_FORWARD_POWER_PKP outOR1 353 FORWARD POWER DIRECTIONAL POWER VO_025_DIRECTIONAL_POWER_PKP 370 DIR PWR2 STG PKP 371 DIR PWR3 STG PKP 372 OR3 373 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 DIR PWR1 STG PKP 390 OR3 409 FREQ RATE1 PKP 410 FREQ RATE2 PKP 411 FREQ RATE3 PKP 412 VO_052_81DF DT PKP 413 OR3 414 VO_...

Страница 760: ...O 396 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 VO_029_LOCKED_ROTOR_PKP 404 LOAD ENCROACHMENT PICKUP OR3 417 LOAD ENCR1 PKP 418 LOAD ENCR2 PKP 419 LOAD ENCR3 PKP 420 VO_031_LOAD_ENCROAC 421 VO_031_LOAD_ENCROACHMENT_PKP 422 OR7 InOR1 InOR2 InOR3 423 InOR4 InOR5 InOR6 InOR7 inOR1 OutOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 WATTIMETRIC GROUND FAULT PKP OR3 443 32N1 HIGH PKP 444 32N2 HIGH PKP 445 inOR1 32N3 HIGH PKP inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 ...

Страница 761: ...ENT_TRIP 57 VO_064_50N_TRIP 58 59 PH TOC1 HIGH OP 117 PH TOC2 HIGH OP 118 PH TOC3 HIGH OP 119 PH IOC1 HIGH OP 120 PH IOC2 HIGH OP 121 PH IOC3 HIGH OP 122 PH IOC1 LOW OP 123 PH IOC2 LOW OP 124 PH IOC3 LOW OP 125 THERMAL1 OP 129 THERMAL2 OP 130 THERMAL3 OP 131 NEUTRAL IOC1 OP 132 NEUTRAL IOC2 OP 133 NEUTRAL IOC3 OP 134 NEUTRAL TOC1 OP 135 NEUTRAL TOC3 OP 136 NEUTRAL TOC2 OP 137 VO_019_PHASE_OVERCURR...

Страница 762: ...2 OP 127 NEG SEQ TOC3 OP 128 GROUND IOC1 OP 138 GROUND IOC2 OP 139 GROUND IOC3 OP 140 SENS GND IOC1 OP 144 SENS GND IOC2 OP 145 SENS GND IOC3 OP 146 SENS GND TOC1 OP 147 SENS GND TOC2 OP 148 SENS GND TOC3 OP 149 OR3 174 OR3 180 ISOLATED GND1 OP 181 ISOLATED GND2 OP 182 ISOLATED GND3 OP 183 VO_044_50IG_TRIP 184 VO_044_50IG_TRIP 185 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 VO_020_ALL_OVERCU...

Страница 763: ...6 VO_073_27P_TRIP 77 VO_074_59P_TRIP 78 VO_075_59NH_TRIP 79 80 VO_078_27X_TRIP 82 PHASE UV1 OP 150 PHASE UV2 OP 151 PHASE UV3 OP 152 PHASE OV1 OP 153 PHASE OV2 OP 154 PHASE OV3 OP 155 NEUTRAL OV1 HIGH OP 156 NEUTRAL OV2 HIGH OP 157 NEUTRAL OV3 HIGH OP 158 NEUTRAL OV1 LOW OP 159 NEUTRAL OV2 LOW OP 160 NEUTRAL OV3 LOW OP 161 AUXILIARY OV1 OP 162 AUXILIARY OV2 OP 163 AUXILIARY OV3 OP 164 AUXILIARY UV...

Страница 764: ...R_ 305 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 FORWARD POWER OR6 356 FWD PWR1 STG1 OP 357 FWD PWR1 STG2 OP 358 FWD PWR2 STG1 OP 359 FWD PWR2 STG2 OP 360 FWD PWR3 STG1 OP 361 FWD PWR3 STG2 OP inOR1 inOR2 362 inOR3 VO_024_FORWARD_POWER_ inOR4 inOR5 363 inOR6 outOR1 DIRECTIONAL POWER DIR PWR1 STG OP 380 DIR PWR2 STG OP 381 DIR PWR3 STG OP 382 OR3 383 VO_027_DIRECTIONAL_POWE 384 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 OR3 427 OR3 ...

Страница 765: ...RIP 389 LOCKED ROTOR OR3 398 LOCKED ROTOR1 OP 399 LOCKED ROTOR2 OP 400 LOCKED ROTOR3 OP 401 VO_030_LOCKED_ROTOR_TR 402 VO_030_LOCKED_ROTOR_TRIP 403 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 LOAD ENCROACHMENT TRIP LOAD ENCR1 OP 435 LOAD ENCR2 OP 436 LOAD ENCR3 OP 437 OR3 438 VO_032_LOAD_ENCROACHM 439 OR7 inOR1 inOR2 inOR3 outOR1 440 InOR1 VO_032_LOAD_ENCROACHMENT_TRIP InOR2 InOR3 441 InOR4 InOR5 InOR6 InOR7 OutOR1 ...

Страница 766: ...GEK 106310AB F650 Digital Bay Controller G 11 APPENDIX G G 1 FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC G ...

Страница 767: ...G 12 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB G 1 FACTORY DEFAULT LOGIC APPENDIX G G ...

Страница 768: ...Address Oct1 0 N A 0 255 2nd octet of IP address IP Address Oct2 0 N A 0 255 3rd octet of IP address IP Address Oct3 0 N A 0 255 4th octet of IP address IP Address Oct4 0 N A 0 255 1st octet of Netmask Netmask Oct1 0 N A 0 255 2nd octet of Netmask Netmask Oct2 0 N A 0 255 3rd octet of Netmask Netmask Oct3 0 N A 0 255 4th octet of Netmask Netmask Oct4 0 N A 0 255 1st octet of Gateway Gateway IP Oct...

Страница 769: ... of IP address of DNP master 3 IP Addr Client3 Oct3 0 N A 0 255 4th Octect of IP address of DNP master 3 IP Addr Client3 Oct4 0 N A 0 255 1st Octect of IP address of DNP master 4 IP Addr Client4 Oct1 0 N A 0 255 2nd Octect of IP address of DNP master 4 IP Addr Client4 Oct2 0 N A 0 255 3nd Octect of IP address of DNP master 4 IP Addr Client4 Oct3 0 N A 0 255 4th Octect of IP address of DNP master 4...

Страница 770: ...TL EVENTS 1 16 N A See DNP note2 Size customization and change of DNP Binary Inputs point list Binary Input Block 2 CTL EVENTS 17 32 N A See DNP note2 Size customization and change of DNP Binary Inputs point list Binary Input Block 3 CTL EVENTS 33 48 N A See DNP note2 Size customization and change of DNP Binary Inputs point list Binary Input Block 4 CTL EVENTS 49 64 N A See DNP note2 Size customiz...

Страница 771: ...Synchronization Event 0 N A 0 3600 IEC 870 5 104 NOTES Note 1 Cyclic Meter Period 0 value means no spontaneous metering PRODUCT SETUP COMMUNICATION SETTINGS SNTP SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Port used UDP port 123 1 1 65535 IP Address OCT 1 Server IP Oct 1 0 1 1 255 IP Address OCT 2 Server IP Oct 2 0 1 1 255...

Страница 772: ...ence impedance angle Zero Seq Angle 75 1 Deg 25 90 Line length Line Length 100 0 0 1 0 0 2000 0 Display fault on HMI Show Fault On HMI DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT PRODUCT SETUP OSCILLOGRAPHY SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Function Permission Function ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Prefault...

Страница 773: ...YE N A WYE DELTA Rated voltage Nominal Voltage 100 0 0 1 1 0 250 0 Rated Frequency Nominal Frequency 50 Hz Hz 50 60 Phase rotation Phase Rotation ABC N A ABC ACB Frequency reference Frequency Reference VI N A VI VII VIII Auxiliary Voltage Auxiliary Voltage VX N A VX VN Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED RELAY Out of service STATUS RELAY OOS STATUS ENABLED N A D...

Страница 774: ...gear 2 Snapshot Events SWGR 2 DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Snapshot Event generation for switchgear 3 Snapshot Events SWGR 3 DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Snapshot Event generation for switchgear 4 Snapshot Events SWGR 4 DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Snapshot Event generation for switchgear 5 Snapshot Events SWGR 5 DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Snapshot Event generation for switchgear 6 Snapshot ...

Страница 775: ... DFT N A PHASOR RMS Pickup level Pickup Level 30 00 0 01 A 0 05 160 00 Trip time Trip Delay 0 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Reset time Reset Delay 0 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS PHASE CURRENT PHASE DIRECTIONAL PHASE DIRECTIONAL 1 PHASE DIRECTIONAL 2 PHASE DIRECTIONAL 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP R...

Страница 776: ...napshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS NEUTRAL CURRENT NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 1 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 2 NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Maximum Torque Angle MTA 45 1 Deg 90 90 Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N A FORWARD REVERSE Polariz...

Страница 777: ...ction DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Maximum Torque Angle MTA 45 1 Deg 90 90 Operation Direction Direction FORWARD N A FORWARD REVERSE Polarization type Polarization VO N A V0 IP V0 IP V0 IP Block logic type Block Logic PERMISSION N A BLOCK PERMISSION Polarization voltage threshold Pol V Threshold 10 1 V 0 300 Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT PROTECTIO...

Страница 778: ... s 0 00 900 00 Deviation time to instantaneous Time to inst 0 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 1 SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 2 SENSITIVE GROUND DIRECTIONAL 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Function...

Страница 779: ...1 V 3 300 Trip time Trip Delay 10 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Reset time Reset Delay 0 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Operation logic Logic ANY PHASE N A ANY PHASE TWO PHASES ALL PHASES Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS VOLTAGE ELEMENTS NEUTRAL OV HIGH NEUTRAL OV HIGH 1 NEUTRAL OV HIGH 2 NEUTRAL OV HIGH 3 NEUTRAL OV LOW NEUTRAL OV LOW 1 NEUTRAL OV...

Страница 780: ...LUE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Pickup Level Pickup Level 10 1 V 3 300 Curve shape Curve DEFINITE TIME N A DEFINITE TIME INVERSE TIME Time Dial Delay 10 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT PROTECTION ELEMENTS POWER FORWARD POWER FORWARD POWER 1 FORWARD POWER 2 FORWARD POWER 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME D...

Страница 781: ...000 00 Trip time for stage 2 Stage 2 Time 60 00 0 01 s 0 00 900 00 Snapshot Event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT CONTROL ELEMENTS SETTING GROUP SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Setting Grouping Permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Active Group Active Group GROUP 1 N A GROUP 1 GROUP 2 GROUP 3 Snapshot Event generation Snapsh...

Страница 782: ... 10 00 0 01 V 2 00 300 00 Angle Difference Max Angle Difference 10 0 0 1 Deg 2 0 80 0 Frequency Slip Max Freq Difference 20 10 mHz 10 5000 Breaker Closing time Time 0 50 0 01 s 0 01 600 00 Dead Line Dead Bus Function permission DL DB Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Live Line Dead Bus Function permission LL DB Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Dead Line Live Bus Function permission DL L...

Страница 783: ...ENTS VT FUSE FAILURE SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Function permission Function DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Snapshot event generation Snapshot Events ENABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED SETPOINT CONTROL ELEMENTS BROKEN CONDUCTOR BROKEN CONDUCTOR 1 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 2 BROKEN CONDUCTOR 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Function permission Functio...

Страница 784: ...sis X 1 0 0 1 0 0 50 0 Analog Direction for Activation Inside or Outside the Deadband Analog Direction X OUT N A IN OUT Note X is the analog comparator index up to 20 SETPOINT CONTROL ELEMENTS FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 1 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 2 FREQUENCY RATE OF CHANGE 3 SETTING DESCRIPTION NAME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Function Permission Function DISABLED N ...

Страница 785: ...V 2 00 70 00 Source of operating current Current selection IN N A IN IG Pickup Level for Overcurrent OC Pickup Level 0 005 0 001A 0 005 0 400 Pickup Delay for Overcurrent OC Pickup Delay 0 2 0 01 s 0 00 600 00 Pickup Level for operating Power Power Pickup 0 01 0 01 W 0 01 4 50 Max torque angle MTA 0 1 Deg 0 360 Pickup Delay for Operating Power Power Pickup Delay 0 2 0 01 s 0 00 600 00 Curve shape ...

Страница 786: ...0 230 Debounce time for Group A Debounce Time A_X 15 1 ms 1 50 Debounce time for Group B Debounce Time B_X 15 1 ms 1 50 Debounce time for Group C Debounce Time C_X 15 1 ms 1 50 Debounce time for Group D Debounce Time D_X 15 1 ms 1 50 Input type Input Type_X_CCY CCY POSITIVE N A POSITIVE EDGE NEGATIVE EDGE POSITIVE NEGATIVE Input signal time delay Delay Input Time_X_CCY CCY 0 1 ms 0 60000 Output lo...

Страница 787: ...AME DEFAULT VALUE STEP RANGE USER VALUE Remote comms selection Remote Comms NONE N A NONE GSSE GOOSE SETTING DESCRIPTION FOR GSSE Remote comms selection Remote Comms GSSE N A NONE GSSE GOOSE Device Identification 650 ID F650 N A Hold time signal send by the transmiting device Hold Time 10000 1 ms 1000 60000 Snapshot Events Generation Snapshot Events Remote Out DISABLED N A DISABLED ENABLED Remote ...

Страница 788: ...ONT OP OPER_F_03 VO_048_50G_PKP CONT OP OPER_F_04 VO_049_51G_PKP CONT OP OPER_F_05 VO_051_50PH_PKP VO_050_50PL_PKP CONT OP OPER_F_06 VO_053_51P_PKP CONT OP OPER_F_07 OPERATION BIT 1 AR CLOSE BREAKER CONT OP OPER_F_08 OPERATION BIT 2 VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP SETPOINT RELAY CONFIGURATION LEDS LED SOURCE SOURCE LOGIC LOGIC LED NAME LED01 VO_000_PROTECTION ALARM PROT ALARM LED02 VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP TRIP LE...

Страница 789: ...OUP 2 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC2 50P BLOCK CC2 PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 1 PH IOC2 HIGH C BLK GROUP 2 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC2 50P BLOCK CC2 PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 1 PH IOC3 HIGH A BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC2 50P BLOCK CC2 PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 1 PH IOC3 HIGH B BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC2 50P BLOCK CC2 PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 1 PH IOC3 HIGH C BL...

Страница 790: ...OUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC2 50P BLOCK CC2 PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 2 PH IOC3 LOW C BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC2 50P BLOCK CC2 PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 2 NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED NEUTRAL DIR1 OP NOT NEUTRAL IOC2 BLOCK GROUP 2 BLOCKED NEUTRAL DIR2 OP NOT NEUTRAL IOC3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED NEUTRAL DIR3 OP NOT GROUND IOC1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC5 50G BLO...

Страница 791: ...HASE DIR2 A OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 5 PH TOC2 HIGH B BLK GROUP 2 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC3 51P BLOCK CC3 PHASE DIR2 B OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 5 PH TOC2 HIGH C BLK GROUP 2 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC3 51P BLOCK CC3 PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 5 PH TOC3 HIGH A BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC3 51P BLOCK CC3 PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 5 PH TOC3 HIGH B BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC3 51P BLOCK C...

Страница 792: ... GROUP 2 BLOCKED PHASE UV3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED NEG SEQ OV1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED NEG SEQ OV2 BLOCK GROUP 2 BLOCKED NEG SEQ OV3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED THERMAL1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED THERMAL2 BLOCK GROUP 2 BLOCKED THERMAL3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED PHASE DIR1 BLK INP GROUP 1 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC4 67P BLOCK CC4 LATCHED VIRT IP 9 PHASE DIR2 BLK INP GROUP 2 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC4 67P BLOCK CC4 LATCHED VIRT...

Страница 793: ...ROUP 3 BLOCKED NEG SEQ TOC1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED NEG SEQ TOC2 BLOCK GROUP 2 BLOCKED NEG SEQ TOC3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED OVERFREQ1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED OVERFREQ2 BLOCK GROUP 2 BLOCKED OVERFREQ3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED UNDERFREQ1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED UNDERFREQ2 BLOCK GROUP 2 BLOCKED UNDERFREQ3 BLOCK GROUP 3 BLOCKED SETT GROUPS BLOCK Not Configured BROKEN CONDUCT1 BLK GROUP 1 BLOCKED BROKEN CONDUCT2 ...

Страница 794: ...1P BLOCK CC3 PHASE DIR2 C OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 6 PH TOC3 LOW A BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC3 51P BLOCK CC3 PHASE DIR3 A OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 6 PH TOC3 LOW B BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC3 51P BLOCK CC3 PHASE DIR3 B OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 6 PH TOC3 LOW C BLK GROUP 3 BLOCKED CONT IP_F_CC3 51P BLOCK CC3 PHASE DIR3 C OP NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 6 DIR PWR1 BLOCK GROUP 1 BLOCKED DIR PWR2 BLOCK GRO...

Страница 795: ... LATCHED VIRT IP 13 AR CONDS INPUT SYNCHK CLOSE PERM NOT NOT LATCHED VIRT IP 15 BKR FAIL INITIATE Not Configured GROUP 1 ACT ON Not Configured GROUP 2 ACT ON Not Configured GROUP 3 ACT ON Not Configured FAULT REPORT TRIGG VO_083_GENERAL_TRIP CLEAR FAULT REPORTS Not Configured DEMAND TRIGGER INP Not Configured DEMAND RESET INP OPERATION BIT 7 FREEZE ENERGY CNT Not Configured UNFREEZE ENERGY CNT Not...

Страница 796: ...URCE Operation1 CLOSE BREAKER INTERLOCK LOGIC SYNCHK CLOSE PERM FINAL STATES AND LOGIC BREAKER CLOSED FRONT KEY I Key INPUT Not configured VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured TIMEOUT 1000 CHANNELS ALL Operation2 OPEN BREAKER INTERLOCK LOGIC Not configured FINAL STATES AND LOGIC BREAKER OPEN FRONT KEY O Key INPUT Not configured VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured TIMEOUT 1000 CHANNELS ALL Operation3 LEDS RESET...

Страница 797: ...GER OSCILLO INTERLOCK LOGIC Not configured FINAL STATES AND LOGIC Not configured FRONT KEY Not configured INPUT Not configured VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured TIMEOUT 500 CHANNELS ALL Operation9 Not configured INTERLOCK LOGIC Not configured FINAL STATES AND LOGIC Not configured FRONT KEY Not configured INPUT Not configured VIRTUAL OUTPUT Not configured TIMEOUT Not configured CHANNELS Not configured ...

Страница 798: ... OPEN ALARM NO CLOSED TEXT 52 CLOSE ALARM NO ERROR 00 TEXT 52 ERROR ALARM N A ERROR 11 TEXT 52 UNDEFINED ALARM N A OPENING INIT OPERATION BIT 2 CLOSING INIT OPERATION BIT 1 SWITCHGEAR 2 CONTACTS Not Configured OPENING TIME Not Configured CLOSING TIME Not Configured CONTACT A SOURCE Not Configured CONTACT B SOURCE Not Configured OPEN TEXT Not Configured ALARM Not Configured CLOSED TEXT Not Configur...

Страница 799: ...OURCE Not Configured CONTACT B SOURCE Not Configured OPEN TEXT Not Configured ALARM Not Configured CLOSED TEXT Not Configured ALARM Not Configured ERROR 00 TEXT Not Configured ALARM Not Configured ERROR 11 TEXT Not Configured ALARM Not Configured OPENING INIT Not Configured CLOSING INIT Not Configured SETPOINT RELAY CONFIGURATION SWITCHGEAR SWITCHGEAR SETTING VALUE SOURCE SIGNAL LOGIC SOURCE LOGIC...

Страница 800: ...s shipped as of 1 October 2013 GE Digital Energy warrants most of its GE manufactured products for 10 years For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers see the GE Digital Energy Terms and Conditions at https www gedigitalenergy com multilin warranty htm For products shipped before 1 October 2013 the standard 24 month warranty applies ...

Страница 801: ...I 2 F650 Digital Bay Controller GEK 106310AB I 1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY APPENDIX I I ...

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для Multilin F650

Бренд: ABB Страницы: 139

Бренд: ABB Страницы: 28

Бренд: ABB Страницы: 59

Бренд: Eaton Страницы: 86

Бренд: Watts Страницы: 2

Бренд: Hanbay Страницы: 18

Бренд: BabySafe Страницы: 24

Бренд: CAME Страницы: 18

Бренд: CAME Страницы: 28

Бренд: CAME Страницы: 28

Бренд: CAME Страницы: 4

Бренд: CAME Страницы: 40

Бренд: CAME Страницы: 26

Бренд: CAME Страницы: 34

Бренд: CAME Страницы: 2

Бренд: JENCO Страницы: 36

Бренд: jcm-tech Страницы: 8

Бренд: K'Nex Education Страницы: 56

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды